JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS INC
S-1/A, 1999-09-20
BUSINESS SERVICES, NEC
Previous: EQUITY INVESTOR FUND SEL S&P IND PORT 1999 SER F DEF ASST FD, 487, 1999-09-20
Next: CUMBERLAND BANCORP INC, 8-A12G, 1999-09-20



<PAGE>   1


  AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON SEPTEMBER 20, 1999.


                                                      REGISTRATION NO. 333-84175
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
                            ------------------------

                                AMENDMENT NO. 2

                                       TO

                                    FORM S-1
                             REGISTRATION STATEMENT
                                     UNDER
                           THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
                            ------------------------

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
             (EXACT NAME OF REGISTRANT AS SPECIFIED IN ITS CHARTER)

<TABLE>
<S>                                <C>                                <C>
             DELAWARE                             8700                            13-4069996
 (STATE OR OTHER JURISDICTION OF      (PRIMARY STANDARD INDUSTRIAL             (I.R.S. EMPLOYER
  INCORPORATION OR ORGANIZATION)      CLASSIFICATION CODE NUMBER)           IDENTIFICATION NUMBER)
</TABLE>

                                  627 BROADWAY
                               NEW YORK, NY 10012
                           TELEPHONE: (212) 780-6060
         (ADDRESS, INCLUDING ZIP CODE, AND TELEPHONE NUMBER, INCLUDING
            AREA CODE, OF REGISTRANT'S PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICES)
                            ------------------------
                                  GENE DEROSE
                            CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
                                  627 BROADWAY
                               NEW YORK, NY 10012
                           TELEPHONE: (212) 780-6060
                           FACSIMILE: (212) 780-6075
 (NAME, ADDRESS, INCLUDING ZIP CODE, AND TELEPHONE NUMBER, INCLUDING AREA CODE
                             OF AGENT FOR SERVICE)
                            ------------------------
                                   COPIES TO:

<TABLE>
<S>                                                 <C>
             ALEXANDER D. LYNCH, ESQ.                           JOHN M. WESTCOTT, JR., ESQ.
              KENNETH R. MCVAY, ESQ.                                 HALE AND DORR LLP
          BROBECK, PHLEGER & HARRISON LLP                             60 STATE STREET
             1633 BROADWAY, 47TH FLOOR                               BOSTON, MA 02109
                NEW YORK, NY 10019                                    (617) 526-6000
                  (212) 581-1600
</TABLE>

                            ------------------------
     APPROXIMATE DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PROPOSED SALE TO THE PUBLIC:  As soon
as practicable after the effective date of this Registration Statement.

     If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on
a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of
1933, check the following box. [ ]

     If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering
pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and
list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective
registration statement for the same offering. [ ]

     If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c)
under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act
registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement
for the same offering. [ ]

     If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d)
under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act
registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement
for the same offering. [ ]

     If delivery of the prospectus is expected to be made pursuant to Rule 434,
check the following box. [ ]
                            ------------------------
     THE REGISTRANT HEREBY AMENDS THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT ON SUCH DATE OR
DATES AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO DELAY ITS EFFECTIVE DATE UNTIL THE REGISTRANT SHALL
FILE A FURTHER AMENDMENT WHICH SPECIFICALLY STATES THAT THIS REGISTRATION
STATEMENT SHALL THEREAFTER BECOME EFFECTIVE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 8(a) OF
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933 OR UNTIL THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT SHALL BECOME
EFFECTIVE ON SUCH DATE AS THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION, ACTING
PURSUANT TO SAID SECTION 8(a), MAY DETERMINE.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>   2


                  SUBJECT TO COMPLETION -- SEPTEMBER 20, 1999


- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PROSPECTUS
            , 1999

                         [JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS LOGO]

                        3,125,000 SHARES OF COMMON STOCK

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.:


- - We provide research on Internet commerce.


PROPOSED SYMBOL & MARKET:

- - JPTR/Nasdaq National Market
THE OFFERING:

- - We are offering 3,125,000 shares of our common stock.


- - The underwriters have an option to purchase an additional 183,750 shares from
  us and 285,000 shares from existing shareholders to cover over-allotments.


- - We currently estimate that the price of the shares will be between $15.00 and
  $17.00.

- - This is our initial public offering, and no public market currently exists for
  our shares.

- - Closing:             , 1999.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              PER SHARE    TOTAL
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                                           <C>          <C>
Public offering price:                                        $            $
Underwriting fees:
Proceeds to Jupiter Communications:
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

     THIS INVESTMENT INVOLVES RISK. SEE "RISK FACTORS" BEGINNING ON PAGE 8.

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NEITHER THE SEC NOR ANY STATE SECURITIES COMMISSION HAS DETERMINED WHETHER THIS
PROSPECTUS IS TRUTHFUL OR COMPLETE. NOR HAVE THEY MADE, NOR WILL THEY MAKE, ANY
DETERMINATION AS TO WHETHER ANYONE SHOULD BUY THESE SECURITIES. ANY
REPRESENTATION TO THE CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

DONALDSON, LUFKIN & JENRETTE
                      DEUTSCHE BANC ALEX. BROWN
                                          THOMAS WEISEL PARTNERS LLC
                                                         DLJdirect Inc.

WE WILL AMEND AND COMPLETE THE INFORMATION IN THIS PROSPECTUS. ALTHOUGH WE ARE
PERMITTED BY US FEDERAL SECURITIES LAWS TO OFFER THESE SECURITIES USING THIS
PROSPECTUS, WE MAY NOT SELL THEM OR ACCEPT YOUR OFFER TO BUY THEM UNTIL THE
DOCUMENTATION FILED WITH THE SEC RELATING TO THESE SECURITIES HAS BEEN DECLARED
EFFECTIVE BY THE SEC. THIS PROSPECTUS IS NOT AN OFFER TO SELL THESE SECURITIES
OR OUR SOLICITATION OF YOUR OFFER TO BUY THESE SECURITIES IN ANY JURISDICTION
WHERE THAT WOULD NOT BE PERMITTED OR LEGAL.
<PAGE>   3
Description of graphics on inside front and gatefold cover pages of prospectus:

Inside Front Cover:

[Jupiter Logo] Online Intelligence

Text on upper right-hand side reads:
"Jupiter Research focuses exclusively on the Internet economy, advising
 companies on the economics of all the relationships depicted
 below."

The center of the page has a circular graphic titled "Internet Commerce." Around
the circular graphic are three boxes labeled, clockwise from the top,
"Consumers," "Portals, Destinations," "Advertisers, Retailers." Each of the
three boxes has arrows pointing to the other two boxes around the center
circular graphic.

The Portals, Destinations box contains:
[Sportsline Logo]
[Time Warner Logo]

The Advertisers, Retailers box contains:
[Toys R Us Logo]
[Hertz Logo]

Below the circular graphic, and spanning the bottom of the page, is a box
labeled "Vendors." The vendor box has arrows pointing to the Portals box and the
Advertisers box.

The Vendors box contains:
[Hewlett Packard Logo]
[Doubleclick logo]
[Agency.com logo]

At the bottom of the page is written text:
"These companies all have written contracts with Jupiter and collectively
represent less than 2% of all total revenues."

Gatefold:
Text at top of page reads:
"Strategy is the art of knowing what to do next.
As Internet commerce displaces traditional business models in the media,
marketing, communications and retail industries, Jupiter's research offers
companies a framework for understanding - and profiting from - the future."

[Jupiter Logo] Online Intelligence

www.jup.com

On the left side of the page is a picture of Jupiter's website. Below and to the
right of that web page is a copy of the conference agenda from Jupiter's
Consumer Online Forum.
Text to the left of the second web page reads:
"Consumer Online Forum Agenda
March 2, 1999"

Text to the right of the second web page reads:
"Proprietary Research Tools
Market Forecasts
Primary Consumer Surveys
Customer Valuation Models
Operational Benchmark Models
Executive Surveys
Advertising Spending Data
Web Site Functionality Data
Case Studies"

The right side of the page depicts three cover pages from SPS reports with
accompanying excerpts.

The top report, titled "Digital Commerce Strategies," has an excerpt which reads
as follows:
"Most commerce sites will see a return on the suggestive selling investment
within 12 months of implementation; the largest contributor to the bottom line
will be an increase in the conversion rate of visitors to buyers, potentially
contributing 23 percent of total revenues."

The middle report, titled "Consumer Content Strategies," has an excerpt which
reads as follows:
"Audience acquisition costs for the online events - frequently as low as $10 per
customer - are lower than the costs of most other marketing acquisition efforts.
To gain a registered user, events that generate one-time traffic spikes must
turn this into permanent traffic growth."

The bottom report, titled "Web Technology Strategies," has an excerpt which
reads as follows:
"With only 15 percent of personal consumer devices, such as cell phones, being
able to receive Internet content and services in the next five years, providers
will face a limited opportunity to address this high exposure, mass-market
platform. Near-term opportunities exist to provide content for access devices at
fixed locations, such as hotels."


- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>   4

                               TABLE OF CONTENTS


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                         PAGE
<S>                                      <C>
Prospectus Summary.....................     3
Risk Factors...........................     8
Forward-Looking Statements.............    16
Use of Proceeds........................    17
Dividend Policy........................    17
Capitalization.........................    18
Dilution...............................    19
Selected Financial and Operating
  Data.................................    21
Management's Discussion and Analysis of
  Financial Condition and Results of
  Operations...........................    23
Business...............................    31
</TABLE>



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                         PAGE
<S>                                      <C>
Management.............................    45
Transactions With Directors and
  Principal Stockholders...............    52
Principal Stockholders.................    53
Description of Capital Stock...........    55
Shares Eligible for Future Sale........    57
Underwriting...........................    59
Legal Matters..........................    62
Experts................................    62
Where You Can Find Additional
  Information..........................    62
Index to Financial Statements..........   F-1
</TABLE>

<PAGE>   5

                               PROSPECTUS SUMMARY

     The information below is only a summary of more detailed information
included in other sections of this prospectus. This summary may not contain all
the information that is important to you or that you should consider before
buying shares in the offering. The other information is important, so please
read this entire prospectus carefully. Information contained on our Web site is
not part of this prospectus.

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.

OUR BUSINESS


     We provide research on Internet commerce. Senior executives at client
companies utilize our research to make informed business decisions in a complex
and rapidly changing Internet economy. Our research, which is focused solely on
the Internet economy, provides our clients with comprehensive views of industry
trends, forecasts and best practices. Our analysis, supported by proprietary
data, emphasizes specific, actionable findings. Our research services are
provided primarily through our continuous subscription product, Strategic
Planning Services, which we call SPS. SPS is a combination of proprietary
written analysis, supporting data and access to our analysts. We also produce a
wide range of conferences which offer senior executives the opportunity to hear
first-hand the insights of our analysts and the leading decision makers in the
Internet and technology industries.



     As of June 30, 1999, we had 654 SPS contracts, an increase from 421 on
December 31, 1998 and 145 on December 31, 1997. Our revenues have increased from
$8.5 million in 1997 to $14.8 million in 1998, and from $5.9 million in the six
months ended June 30, 1998 to $14.4 million in the six months ended June 30,
1999. We have a limited operating history, however, and we have incurred net
losses since our formation. As of June 30, 1999, we had an accumulated deficit
of $5.8 million.



MARKET OPPORTUNITY


     We believe that the growth of the Internet, and the growth of Internet
commerce in particular, will continue to expand rapidly for the foreseeable
future both in the United States and abroad. A recent report by University of
Texas' Center for Research in Electronic Commerce estimated that the Internet
economy generated approximately $300 billion in U.S. revenue and was responsible
for 1.2 million jobs as of 1998. A recent study by the Organization for Economic
Cooperation and Development predicted that worldwide Internet commerce may grow
to $1 trillion by 2005. In addition, billion dollar markets are emerging on the
Internet for many different industry sectors. Specifically, for the U.S. we
project that by 2003 the online travel industry will grow to approximately $17
billion, online advertising will grow to approximately $12 billion, overall
consumer online shopping will grow to approximately $43 billion and that total
assets held in online brokerage accounts will grow to approximately $3 trillion.

     The rapid growth of Internet commerce and the related increase in
innovative products, services and technologies have made it difficult for
companies to understand and evaluate the steps they should take to engage in and
expand their Internet commerce activities, promote their online businesses and
compete effectively. Thus, demand is growing for timely and credible research to
assist companies in identifying revenue models and success criteria, analyzing
consumer adoption trends, developing effective sales and marketing strategies,
assessing market trends and analyzing the competitive landscape. Demand for
research, analysis and advice is also expected to increase as the growth in
Internet commerce and consumer use of new technologies impacts more industries
and expands into other geographic areas.

                                        3
<PAGE>   6

OUR STRATEGY

     Our objective is to be the premier global research company focusing on
Internet commerce. Key elements of our business strategy include the following:

     - Providing innovative research on Internet commerce;

     - Increasing our client base in the United States and abroad;

     - Increasing the level of sales to existing clients;

     - Pursuing international opportunities;

     - Continuing to strengthen the Jupiter brand;

     - Increasing the number of conferences that we produce; and

     - Enhancing our Web delivery platform.

OUR HISTORY


     Our business was formed on December 1, 1994 with the creation of Jupiter
Communications, LLC, a New York limited liability company. Upon the closing of
this offering, Jupiter Communications, LLC will change its structure from a
limited liability company to a "C" corporation. This change will be made by
merging Jupiter Communications, LLC with and into Jupiter Communications, Inc.,
a Delaware corporation. Membership units in Jupiter Communications, LLC will be
exchanged in the merger for shares of common stock of Jupiter Communications,
Inc.


     Our principal executive offices are located at 627 Broadway, New York, New
York 10012. Our telephone number is (212) 780-6060. Our Web site is www.jup.com.
References in this prospectus to "Jupiter," "Jupiter Communications," "we,"
"our" and "us" refer to Jupiter Communications, Inc. and its predecessor
entities.

     We have applied for or received trademark and/or service mark registration
for, among others, the marks "Jupiter," "Jupiter Communications," "SPS" and
"Internet Business Report." Any other trademark, trade name or service mark of
any other company appearing in this prospectus belongs to its holder.

                         ------------------------------

     Unless otherwise indicated, all information in this prospectus:

     - reflects the merger of Jupiter Communications, LLC with and into Jupiter
       Communications, Inc., which will be completed upon the closing of this
       offering; and

     - assumes no exercise of the underwriters' over-allotment option.

                                        4
<PAGE>   7

                                  THE OFFERING

Common stock offered by Jupiter....    3,125,000 shares

Common stock to be outstanding
after the offering.................    14,160,335 shares

Use of proceeds....................    We plan to use the proceeds from this
                                       offering for product development,
                                       international expansion, research, sales
                                       and marketing expansion, leasehold and
                                       technology improvements, potential
                                       acquisitions and general corporate
                                       purposes.

Proposed Nasdaq National Market
symbol.............................    JPTR


     The outstanding share information is based on our shares outstanding as of
September 16, 1999. This information excludes 2,532,731 shares of common stock
issuable upon the exercise of stock options outstanding under our option plan as
of September 16, 1999, with a weighted average exercise price of $3.10 per
share. In addition, this information excludes 174,492 shares of common stock
issuable upon the exercise of non-plan options, with a weighted average exercise
price of $0.85 per share.


                                        5
<PAGE>   8

                      SUMMARY FINANCIAL AND OPERATING DATA

     The following tables summarize financial and operating data for our
business. The summary financial and operating data set forth below should be
read in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operations" and our financial statements and related
notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                           SIX MONTHS ENDED
                                                         YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,               JUNE 30,
                                                   -----------------------------------   --------------------
                                                    1995     1996     1997      1998       1998        1999
                                                                                             (UNAUDITED)
                                                             (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
<S>                                                <C>      <C>      <C>       <C>       <C>          <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenues:
  Strategic Planning Services....................  $  237   $  566   $ 1,850   $ 6,183    $ 1,995     $ 8,166
  Conferences....................................   2,024    2,686     3,426     4,890      1,979       4,553
  Other..........................................   1,439    3,000     3,246     3,729      1,939       1,681
                                                   ------   ------   -------   -------    -------     -------
    Total revenues...............................   3,700    6,252     8,522    14,802      5,913      14,400
Cost of services and fulfillment.................   2,893    4,687     6,259     9,676      4,282       6,854
                                                   ------   ------   -------   -------    -------     -------
  Gross profit...................................     807    1,565     2,263     5,126      1,631       7,546
Other operating expenses:
  Sales and marketing............................     254      514     1,558     3,173      1,313       4,008
  General and administrative.....................   1,025    1,664     2,955     4,090      1,918       3,668
                                                   ------   ------   -------   -------    -------     -------
    Total other operating expenses...............   1,279    2,178     4,513     7,263      3,231       7,676
                                                   ------   ------   -------   -------    -------     -------
Net loss.........................................  $ (472)  $ (613)  $(2,250)  $(2,137)   $(1,600)    $  (130)
                                                   ======   ======   =======   =======    =======     =======
Pro forma basic and diluted net loss per common
  share(1).......................................                              $ (0.21)   $ (0.16)    $ (0.01)
                                                                               =======    =======     =======
Pro forma weighted average common shares
  outstanding(1).................................                               10,318     10,318      10,455
</TABLE>


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                           AS OF DECEMBER 31,               AS OF JUNE 30,
                                                   -----------------------------------   --------------------
                                                    1995     1996     1997      1998       1998        1999
<S>                                                <C>      <C>      <C>       <C>       <C>          <C>
SELECTED OPERATING DATA:
Number of SPS contracts..........................      13       66       145       421        219         654
Total contract value (in thousands)..............  $  315   $  923   $ 2,509   $11,666    $ 5,089     $22,138
Number of employees..............................      18       61        88       142        117         194
Capital expenditures (in thousands)..............  $   99   $  199   $   207   $   838    $   258     $ 2,263
</TABLE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                         AS OF JUNE 30, 1999
                                                              ------------------------------------------
                                                                                            PRO FORMA
                                                               ACTUAL     PRO FORMA(2)    AS ADJUSTED(3)
                                                                             (UNAUDITED)
                                                                            (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                           <C>         <C>             <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Cash and cash equivalents...................................  $  1,554      $ 1,554          $46,954
Working capital (4).........................................    (4,972)      (4,972)          40,428
Total assets................................................    15,051       15,051           60,451
Members'/stockholders' equity (deficiency)..................    (1,884)      (1,884)          43,516
</TABLE>

                                                   (Footnotes on following page)

                                        6
<PAGE>   9

- ------------------------------


(1) Pro forma basic and diluted net loss per common share is computed by
    dividing net loss by the pro forma weighted average number of shares of
    common stock. Pro forma weighted average number of shares of common stock
    gives effect to our reorganization from an LLC to a "C" corporation as
    though the reorganization had occurred as of the beginning of each period
    indicated. Pro forma weighted average shares do not include any common stock
    equivalents because inclusion of common stock equivalents would have been
    anti-dilutive.



(2) The pro forma balance sheet data give effect to our reorganization from an
    LLC to a "C" corporation as though the reorganization had occurred as of
    June 30, 1999.



(3) Pro forma as adjusted amounts reflect the sale of 3,125,000 shares of common
    stock in this offering, assuming an initial public offering price of $16.00
    per share, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions
    and estimated offering expenses payable by us.


(4) Our working capital balances are typically negative because of the timing of
    cash collections from clients. SPS contracts are typically annual and paid
    in advance. Accordingly, a substantial portion of our billings is initially
    recorded as deferred revenue and amortized into revenue during the term of
    the contract to which such billings relate.

                                        7
<PAGE>   10

                                  RISK FACTORS

     Any investment in our common stock involves a high degree of risk. You
should consider carefully the following information about these risks, together
with the other information contained in this prospectus, before you decide to
buy our common stock. If any of the following events actually occurs, our
business and financial results may suffer. In this case, the market price of our
common stock could decline, and you could lose all or part of your investment in
our common stock.

IF WE ARE UNABLE TO ATTRACT AND RETAIN EXPERIENCED PERSONNEL, THE QUALITY OF OUR
RESEARCH PRODUCTS AND SERVICES MAY DECLINE, AND OUR ABILITY TO SELL OUR PRODUCTS
AND SERVICES MAY BE HARMED.

     Our success depends in large part on the continued contributions of our
senior management team, research analysts and sales representatives. As of June
30, 1999, we had 38 research analysts and 40 sales representatives. We expect to
increase our hiring of research analysts and sales representatives significantly
in the next few years. We face intense competition in hiring and retaining
personnel from, among others, technology and Internet companies, market research
and consulting firms, print and electronic publishing companies and financial
services companies. Many of these firms have substantially greater financial
resources than we do to attract and retain qualified personnel from a limited
pool of attractive candidates. In addition, some people that we may attempt to
hire could be subject to non-competition agreements that could impede our
recruitment efforts. To the extent that we are unable to retain our existing
management, research analysts or sales representatives or that we are unable to
increase the number of research analysts and sales representatives that we hire,
our business and financial results may suffer.

BECAUSE WE HAVE RECENTLY INTRODUCED MANY OF OUR PRODUCTS AND SERVICES, YOU HAVE
LIMITED INFORMATION UPON WHICH YOU CAN EVALUATE OUR BUSINESS.

     We have recently launched many of the practices and market modules that we
offer. As a result, we have a limited operating history upon which you can
evaluate our business and the products and services that we offer. Due to our
limited operating history, it is difficult or impossible for us to predict
future results of operations. Moreover, due to our limited operating history,
any evaluation of our business and prospects must be made in light of the risks
and uncertainties frequently encountered by companies in new and rapidly
evolving markets such as ours. Many of these risks and uncertainties are
discussed elsewhere in this section. We cannot assure you that we will be
successful in addressing these risks and uncertainties. Our failure to do so
could cause our business and financial results to suffer.

RAPID GROWTH IN OUR BUSINESS COULD STRAIN OUR MANAGERIAL, OPERATIONAL AND
FINANCIAL RESOURCES.

     The anticipated future growth of our business will place a significant
strain on our managerial, operational and financial resources. We had 61
employees at December 31, 1996, 88 employees at December 31, 1997, 142 employees
at December 31, 1998 and 194 employees at June 30, 1999. We anticipate hiring a
substantial number of research analysts, sales representatives and other
employees in the foreseeable future to expand our product and service offerings
and to expand our sales of such products and services. We may also decide to
open additional offices in the United States and abroad. As we expand, we expect
that we will need to continually improve our financial and managerial controls,
billing systems, reporting systems and procedures. In addition, as we expand we
will also need to increase our employee training efforts. If we are unable to
manage our growth effectively, our business and financial results may suffer.

WE HAVE A HISTORY OF OPERATING LOSSES WHICH MAY CONTINUE FOR THE FORESEEABLE
FUTURE.

     We have incurred substantial costs to create, market and distribute our
products and services, to retain qualified personnel, including management,
research analysts and sales representatives, and to grow our business. As a
result, we incurred net losses of approximately $613,000 in 1996, $2.3 million
in 1997, $2.1 million in 1998 and $130,000 for the six month period ended June
30, 1999. As a percentage of total

                                        8
<PAGE>   11

revenues, our net losses equaled 9.8% in 1996, 26.4% in 1997, 14.4% in 1998 and
0.9% for the six month period ended June 30, 1999. As of June 30, 1999, our
accumulated deficit totaled $5.8 million.

     We intend to invest heavily in new products and services, leasehold and
technology improvements, new research and sales personnel and international
expansion. As a result, we will need to achieve significant revenue increases to
achieve and maintain profitability. The number of clients for our research
products and services, as well as the number of attendees to our conferences,
may grow more slowly than we anticipate or may even decrease in the future. In
addition, even if we become profitable, we may not sustain or increase our
profits on a quarterly or annual basis in the future.

OUR OPERATING RESULTS MAY FLUCTUATE IN FUTURE PERIODS, WHICH MAY CAUSE
VOLATILITY OR A DECLINE IN THE PRICE OF OUR STOCK.

     Our revenues, expenses and operating results have varied in the past and
may fluctuate significantly in the future due to a variety of factors that are
outside of our control. These factors include, among others:

     - the level and timing of new business and renewals of subscriptions to our
       research products and services;

     - changes in the market demand for research products or analysis regarding
       Internet commerce;

     - the levels of attendance at our Internet conferences; and

     - the extent to which we experience increased competition.

     The above factors could affect our quarterly as well as long-term financial
results. In particular, changes in the demand for our products, competition or
the levels of attendance at our Internet conferences each could have both
short-term and long-term adverse effects on our business.

     Our revenues, expenses and operating results may also fluctuate
significantly in the future as a result of business decisions made by us. These
decisions include, among others:

     - the timing of the introduction and marketing of our new research products
       and services;

     - the timing of our conferences;

     - changes in operating expenses; and

     - the timing of acquisitions and the impact on our operations and our
       operating results.

     The sales of our research products and services and the success of our
conferences are difficult to forecast accurately. If our revenues fall short of
expectations, we may not be able to adjust our fixed expenses, which represented
approximately 45% of our total expenses for the six months ended June 30, 1999,
to compensate for this shortfall on a timely basis. Further, as a strategy for
remaining competitive, we may have to make pricing, service or marketing
decisions that could cause our business and financial results to suffer.

     Due to all the foregoing factors and other risks discussed in this section,
you should not rely on quarter-to-quarter comparisons of our results of
operations as an indication of future performance. It is possible that in some
future periods our results of operations may be below the expectations of
investors. In this event, the price of our common stock is likely to fall.

BECAUSE OUR REVENUES ARE SUBSTANTIALLY DEPENDENT ON THE SALE OF OUR STRATEGIC
PLANNING SERVICES, OUR BUSINESS MAY SUFFER IF WE HAVE DIFFICULTY IN ACQUIRING OR
RETAINING SUBSCRIBERS TO THIS PROGRAM.

     Our business and financial results are dependent on our ability to attract
and retain clients for our Strategic Planning Services. In addition, our
business model assumes that we will be able to increase the level of SPS sales
over time to our existing clients. Revenues from subscriptions to SPS, as a
percentage of our total revenues, were 41.8% in 1998 and 56.7% in the six months
ended June 30, 1999.

                                        9
<PAGE>   12

     Our ability to acquire and retain SPS clients and our ability to increase
sales to existing clients is subject to a number of risks, including the
following:

     - We may be unsuccessful in delivering high-quality and timely research
       analysis to our clients;

     - We may be unsuccessful in anticipating and understanding market trends
       and the changing needs of our clients;

     - The use of the Internet as a medium for commerce, both in the United
       States and abroad, may not continue to grow as we currently anticipate;

     - Our marketing programs designed to attract and retain clients may not
       succeed; and

     - We may not be able to hire and retain a sufficiently large number of
       research and sales personnel in a very competitive job market.

     If we are unable to retain existing clients, increase sales to existing
clients or attract a significant number of new SPS clients, our business and
financial results may suffer.

OUR BUSINESS MAY SUFFER IF WE PROVE UNABLE TO ANTICIPATE MARKET TRENDS OR IF WE
FAIL TO PROVIDE INFORMATION THAT IS USEFUL TO OUR CLIENTS.

     Our success depends in large part on our ability to anticipate, research
and analyze rapidly changing technologies and industries and on our ability to
provide this information in a timely and cost-effective manner. If we are unable
to continue to provide credible and reliable information that is useful to
companies engaged in online commerce, our business and financial results may
suffer.

     Our research products and services, as well as our conferences, focus on
Internet commerce. Internet commerce is relatively new and is undergoing
frequent and dramatic changes, including the introduction of new products and
the obsolescence of others, shifting business strategies and revenue models, the
formation of numerous new companies and high rates of growth. Because of these
rapid and continuous changes in the Internet commerce markets, we face
significant challenges in providing timely analysis and advice. Many of the
industries and areas on which we focus are relatively new, and it is very
difficult to provide predictions and projections as to the future marketplace,
revenue models and competitive factors. In addition, many companies have not
embraced the use of the Internet as a medium for commerce and are unclear as to
how to allocate corporate resources effectively. As a result, some companies may
conclude that our research products are not useful to their businesses. Further,
the need to continually update our research requires the commitment of
substantial financial and personnel resources.

     If our predictions or projections prove to be wrong, or if we are unable to
continually update our information, our reputation may suffer and demand for our
research products and services may decline. In addition, if companies do not
agree with our analysis of market trends and the areas on which we choose to
focus our efforts, our business and financial results may suffer.

WE FACE INTENSE COMPETITION IN PROVIDING OUR RESEARCH PRODUCTS AND SERVICES, AS
WELL AS IN PRODUCING CONFERENCES, AND SUCH COMPETITION IS LIKELY TO INCREASE IN
THE FUTURE.

     We may not be able to compete successfully against current or future
competitors, and the competitive pressures that we face may cause our business
and financial results to suffer. Our principal current competitor is Forrester
Research, Inc. Recently Gartner Group, Inc. announced its intention to compete
directly in providing research products related to Internet commerce. A number
of other companies compete with us in providing research and analysis related to
a specific industry or geographic area. In addition, our competitors include
information technology research firms, business consulting and accounting firms,
electronic and print publishing companies and equity analysts employed by
financial services companies.

     Our ability to compete both in the United States and abroad depends upon
many factors, many of which are outside of our control. We believe that the
primary competitive factors determining success in

                                       10
<PAGE>   13

our markets include the quality and timeliness of our research and analysis, our
ability to offer products and services that meet the changing needs of our
customers, the prices we charge for our various research products and general
economic conditions.

     We expect competition to increase because of the business opportunities
presented by the growth of Internet commerce around the world. Competition may
also intensify as a result of industry consolidation, because the markets in
which we operate face few substantial barriers to entry or because some of our
competitors may provide additional or complementary services, such as consulting
services. Increased competition may result in reduced operating margins, loss of
market share and diminished value in our products and services, as well as
different pricing, service or marketing decisions.


     Our current and potential competitors include many companies that have
substantially greater financial, information gathering and marketing resources
than we have. For example, Gartner Group, Forrester Research and META Group,
Inc. each had higher revenues than we did during 1998, and each currently has
greater marketing resources than we have. This may allow them to devote greater
resources than we can to the promotion of their brand and to the development and
sale of their products and services. We cannot assure you that we will be able
to compete successfully against current and future competitors.


WE EXPECT GARTNER GROUP, OUR LARGEST SHAREHOLDER, WHICH HAS BEEN PROVIDED WITH
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION, TO COMPETE DIRECTLY WITH US AND
POSSIBLY TO USE ITS VOTING POWER IN A WAY THAT WOULD NEGATIVELY AFFECT OUR
ABILITY TO OPERATE OUR BUSINESS.

     Gartner Group, which historically has focused on information technology
research, has recently announced its intention to begin offering broader
research products and services related to Internet commerce. These products and
services are likely to compete directly with the products and services that we
offer. Under the operating agreement governing Jupiter Communications, LLC,
Gartner Group has the right to appoint two of the five representatives of the
board of members and has the right to consent to various actions taken by us.
Following the closing of this offering, Gartner Group will not retain the right
to appoint a member of our board of directors or any other specific rights,
other than piggyback registration rights and limited indemnification rights.
Following this offering, Gartner Group will be our largest shareholder, owning
approximately 28.4% of our outstanding common stock. However, for a period of
one year following the closing of this offering, Gartner Group and its
affiliates may not acquire, directly or indirectly, any additional common stock,
if the acquisition would cause Gartner Group and its affiliates to own more than
32% of our common stock.

     Although Gartner Group has not been actively involved in our day-to-day
operations since it first invested in our company in October 1997, it has been
provided with our confidential and proprietary data during most of this period.
As a result, Gartner Group could use our confidential and proprietary data in
developing and marketing competing products and services. Gartner Group could
also use its voting power in a way that would negatively affect our ability to
operate our business or have the effect of delaying, deterring or preventing a
change in control, or impeding a merger, consolidation, takeover or other
business combination. Gartner Group has substantially greater financial
resources than we do, which may allow it to devote greater resources than we can
to the development and sale of their Internet commerce research.

IF INTERNET USAGE DOES NOT CONTINUE TO GROW, OUR BUSINESS AND FINANCIAL RESULTS
MAY SUFFER.

     Our future success depends on continued growth in the use of the Internet.
We cannot be certain that Internet usage will continue to grow at or above its
historical rates. Internet usage may be inhibited for a number of reasons,
including:

     - inadequate network infrastructure;

     - inconsistent quality of service; and

     - lack of availability of cost-effective, high-speed service.

                                       11
<PAGE>   14

OUR BUSINESS MAY SUFFER IF THE USE OF THE INTERNET AS A COMMERCIAL MARKETPLACE
DOES NOT CONTINUE TO GROW.

     Because our company focuses solely on Internet commerce, our future success
depends on the continued development and acceptance of the Internet as a viable
commercial medium. However, the continued development and acceptance of the
Internet as a widely-used medium for commerce and communication is uncertain. A
number of factors could prevent such continued development and acceptance,
including the following:

     - unwillingness of companies and consumers to shift their purchasing from
       traditional vendors to online vendors;

     - security and authentication concerns with respect to the transmission of
       confidential information, such as credit card numbers, over the Internet;

     - privacy concerns, including those related to the ability of Web sites to
       gather user information without the user's knowledge or consent; and

     - significant uncertainty about the demand and market acceptance for
       Internet advertising and the lack of standards to measure the
       effectiveness of Internet advertising.

LAWS AND REGULATIONS COULD SLOW THE GROWTH OF THE INTERNET AND NEGATIVELY AFFECT
THE ACCEPTANCE OF THE INTERNET AS A COMMERCIAL MEDIUM.

     Laws and regulations regarding Internet companies and commercial
transactions conducted over the Internet could slow the growth in use of the
Internet generally and decrease the acceptance of the Internet as a commercial
medium. For example, as the popularity and use of the Internet increases, it is
possible that a number of laws and regulations may be adopted in the United
States or in other countries covering issues such as taxation, intellectual
property matters, advertising and other areas. We cannot predict the impact, if
any, that future laws or regulations may have on our business.

WE COULD FACE ADDITIONAL RISKS AND CHALLENGES IF WE CONTINUE TO EXPAND
INTERNATIONALLY.

     Our business plan calls for increased international growth. Expansion into
new geographic territories requires considerable management and financial
resources and may negatively impact our near-term results of operations.

     Our current international operations, as well as any future international
operations, are subject to numerous challenges and risks, including, but not
limited to, the following:

     - political and economic conditions in various jurisdictions;

     - fluctuations in currency exchange rates;

     - tariffs and other trade barriers;

     - adverse tax consequences; and

     - difficulties in protecting intellectual property rights in international
       jurisdictions.

     We cannot assure you that one or more of these factors would not harm any
current or future international operations.

OUR BUSINESS MAY SUFFER IF WE ARE UNABLE TO MAINTAIN OR ENHANCE AWARENESS OF THE
JUPITER BRAND OR IF WE INCUR EXCESSIVE EXPENSES ATTEMPTING TO PROMOTE THE
JUPITER BRAND.

     We expect to use a portion of the proceeds of this offering to expand our
marketing activities to promote and strengthen the Jupiter brand. Promoting and
strengthening the Jupiter brand is critical to our efforts to attract and retain
clients for our research products, as well as to increase attendance at our
conferences. We believe that the importance of brand recognition will likely
increase due to the increasing

                                       12
<PAGE>   15

number of competitors entering our markets. In order to promote the Jupiter
brand, in response to competitive pressures or otherwise, we may find it
necessary to increase our marketing budget, hire additional marketing and public
relations personnel or otherwise increase our financial commitment to creating
and maintaining brand loyalty among our clients. If we fail to effectively
promote and maintain the Jupiter brand, or incur excessive expenses attempting
to promote and maintain the Jupiter brand, our business and financial results
may suffer.

WE FACE POTENTIAL LIABILITY FOR INFORMATION THAT WE PUBLISH, PROVIDE AT
CONFERENCES OR DISSEMINATE THROUGH OUR RESEARCH ANALYSTS.

     As a publisher and distributor of original research, market projections and
trend analyses, we face potential liability based on a variety of theories,
including defamation, negligence, copyright or trademark infringement or other
legal theories based on the nature, publication or distribution of this
information. Such claims, whether brought in the United States or abroad, would
likely divert management time and attention and result in significant cost to
investigate and defend, regardless of the merit of any such claims. The filing
of any such claims may also damage our reputation as a high-quality provider of
unbiased, timely analysis and result in client cancellations or overall
decreased demand for our products and services. In addition, if we become
subject to these types of claims and are not successful in our defense, we may
be forced to pay substantial damages. Our insurance may not adequately protect
us against these claims.

DISRUPTION OF OUR WEB SITE DUE TO SECURITY BREACHES AND SYSTEM FAILURES COULD
HARM OUR BUSINESS AND RESULT IN CLIENT CANCELLATIONS.

     Our infrastructure and the infrastructure of our service providers are
vulnerable to security breaches, computer viruses or similar disruptive problems
and system failures. These systems are also subject to telecommunications
failures, power loss and various other events. Any of these events, whether
intentional or accidental, could lead to interruptions or disruptions in the
general operation of our business. In addition, any of these events could also
lead to interruptions, delays or cessation of operation of our Web site, which
provides access to and distribution of many of our research products and
services. For example, many of our SPS clients pay us so that their employees
can read our research solely on our Web site. As a result, providing unimpeded
access to our Web site is critical to servicing our clients and providing
superior customer service. Our inability to provide continuous access to our Web
site could cause some of our clients to discontinue purchasing our research
products and services, prevent or deter some people from purchasing our research
products and services and harm our business reputation.

WE ARE DEPENDENT ON KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL FOR OUR FUTURE SUCCESS.

     Our future success will depend in part on the continued service of a number
of key management personnel. We do not carry key person life insurance on any of
our management personnel. The loss of key management personnel, in particular
Gene DeRose, our Chief Executive Officer, or Kurt Abrahamson, our President and
Chief Operating Officer, could harm our business and financial results.

IF WE FAIL TO ADEQUATELY PROTECT OUR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY OR FACE A CLAIM OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT BY A THIRD PARTY, WE MAY LOSE OUR
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS AND BE LIABLE FOR SIGNIFICANT DAMAGES.

     We provide our proprietary research products to hundreds of different
companies throughout the world, including some companies that compete with us in
some manner. As a result, any protective steps we have taken may be inadequate
to protect our intellectual property and to deter misappropriation of the
original research and analysis that we develop. We also may be unable to detect
the unauthorized use of our intellectual property or take appropriate steps to
enforce our intellectual property rights. Moreover, effective trademark,
copyright and trade secret protection may not be available in every country in
which we offer our research products and services to the extent these
protections are available in the United States.

                                       13
<PAGE>   16

     Our failure to adequately protect our intellectual property, either in the
United States or abroad, could harm the Jupiter brand or our trademarks, devalue
our proprietary research and analysis and affect our ability to compete
effectively. Defending our intellectual property rights could result in the
expenditure of significant financial and managerial resources, which could harm
our financial results.

     Furthermore, other parties may assert claims against us that we have
misappropriated a trade secret or infringed a patent, copyright, trademark or
other proprietary right belonging to them. Any infringement or related claims,
even if not meritorious, could be costly and time consuming to litigate, may
distract management from other tasks of operating the business and may result in
the loss of significant rights and the loss of our ability to operate our
business.

WE MAY NOT BE ABLE TO SUCCESSFULLY MAKE ACQUISITIONS OF OTHER COMPANIES,
SERVICES OR PRODUCTS.

     We have limited experience in acquiring other companies, services or
products. Although we have no present understanding or agreement relating to any
acquisition, we do anticipate making acquisitions in the future. We cannot
assure you, however, that we will be able to complete future acquisitions
successfully or to integrate an acquired entity with our current business. In
addition, the key personnel of the acquired company may decide not to work for
us. If we make other types of acquisitions, we could have difficulty
assimilating the acquired services or products. These difficulties could disrupt
our current business, distract our management and employees, increase our
expenses and adversely affect our results of operations. Furthermore, we may
incur debt or issue equity securities to pay for any future acquisitions. The
issuance of equity securities could be dilutive to our existing shareholders.

OUR DIRECTORS, OFFICERS AND PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS WILL EXERCISE SIGNIFICANT
CONTROL OVER US FOLLOWING THIS OFFERING.

     Upon completion of this offering, our officers, directors and existing
stockholders who own greater than 5% of the outstanding common stock before this
offering, and entities affiliated with them, will, in the aggregate,
beneficially own approximately 74.2% of our common stock. In particular, Gartner
Group will own approximately 28.4% of our outstanding common stock. These
stockholders acting together will be able to exert substantial influence over
all matters requiring approval by our stockholders. These matters include the
election and removal of directors and any merger, consolidation or sale of all
or substantially all of our assets. In addition, they may dictate the management
of our business and affairs. This concentration of ownership could have the
effect of delaying, deferring or preventing a change in control, or impeding a
merger, consolidation, takeover or other business combination.

PROBLEMS RESULTING FROM THE YEAR 2000 PROBLEM COULD REQUIRE US TO INCUR
UNANTICIPATED EXPENSES AND COULD DIVERT MANAGEMENT'S TIME AND ATTENTION.


     The Year 2000 problem could harm our business and financial results. Many
currently installed computer systems and software products are coded to accept
or recognize only two-digit entries in the date code field. These systems may
interpret the date code "00" as the year 1900 rather than the year 2000. As a
result, computer systems and/or software used by many companies and governmental
agencies may need to be upgraded or replaced to comply with Year 2000
requirements or risk system failure or miscalculations causing disruptions of
normal business activities. Our failure to correct a Year 2000 problem could
result in an interruption in, or a failure of, aspects of our normal business
activities or operations. Any significant Year 2000 problem could require us to
incur significant unanticipated expenses to remedy these problems and could
divert management's time and attention. We consider the reasonably likely
worst-case scenario to be interruptions in telecommunications networks,
including the Internet. Due to our reliance on the Internet and other
telecommunications networks to keep in contact with our clients and for general
business uses, these interruptions could cause our business to suffer. We have
not developed a contingency plan to address Year 2000 issues. Please see
"Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
Operations--Year 2000 Compliance" for detailed information on our state of
readiness and potential risks regarding the Year 2000 issue.


                                       14
<PAGE>   17

FUTURE SALES OF OUR COMMON STOCK MAY NEGATIVELY AFFECT OUR STOCK PRICE.


     Following this offering, we will have a large number of shares of common
stock outstanding and available for resale beginning at various points of time
in the future. Our largest stockholder, Gartner Group, may be able to sell as
many as 3,515,624 shares of our common stock in the public market beginning 90
days after the date of this prospectus. In addition, in the event that the
over-allotment option is not exercised, one of our non-management stockholders
may be able to sell up to 235,000 shares of our common stock in the public
market. The market price of our common stock could decline as a result of sales
of a large number of shares of our common stock in the market following this
offering, or the perception that such sales could occur. In addition, these
sales also might make it more difficult for us to sell equity securities in the
future at a price that we think is appropriate, or at all. Please see "Shares
Eligible for Future Sale."


THERE HAS BEEN NO PRIOR MARKET FOR OUR COMMON STOCK, AND OUR STOCK MAY
EXPERIENCE EXTREME PRICE AND VOLUME FLUCTUATIONS.

     The stock market has experienced extreme price and volume fluctuations. The
market prices of the securities of Internet-related companies have been
especially volatile. Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for
our common stock. We cannot predict the extent to which investor interest in
Jupiter will lead to the development of an active trading market or how liquid
that market might become. The market price of the common stock may decline below
the initial public offering price. The initial public offering price for the
shares will be determined by negotiations between us and the representatives of
the underwriters and may not be indicative of prices that will prevail in the
trading market. Please see "Underwriting."

     In the past, companies that have experienced volatility in the market price
of their stock have been the object of securities class action litigation. If we
were the object of securities class action litigation, it could result in
substantial costs and a diversion of our management's attention and resources.

WE WILL HAVE BROAD DISCRETION AS TO THE USE OF THE PROCEEDS FROM THIS OFFERING,
WHICH WE MAY NOT USE EFFECTIVELY.


     Our management will have broad discretion over the allocation of the net
proceeds from this offering as well as over the timing of our expenditures.
Investors may not agree with the way our management decides to spend these
proceeds. Please see "Use of Proceeds."


WE CANNOT PREDICT OUR FUTURE CAPITAL NEEDS, AND WE MAY NOT BE ABLE TO SECURE
ADDITIONAL FINANCING.


     We may need to raise additional funds in the future to fund our operations,
to expand or enhance the range of products and services we offer or to respond
to competitive pressures and/or perceived opportunities. We cannot be sure that
additional financing will be available on terms favorable to us, or at all. If
adequate funds are not available when required or on acceptable terms, we may be
forced to cease our operations, and even if we are able to continue our
operations, our business and financial results may suffer.


WE HAVE ANTI-TAKEOVER PROVISIONS WHICH MAY MAKE IT DIFFICULT FOR A THIRD PARTY
TO ACQUIRE US.

     Provisions of our certificate of incorporation, our bylaws and Delaware law
could make it more difficult for a third party to acquire us, even if doing so
might be beneficial to our stockholders. Please see "Description of Capital
Stock."

INVESTORS IN THIS OFFERING WILL SUFFER IMMEDIATE AND SUBSTANTIAL DILUTION.

     Investors purchasing shares in this offering will suffer immediate and
substantial dilution in net tangible book value per share. To the extent
outstanding options to purchase common stock are exercised, there will be
further dilution. Please see "Dilution."

                                       15
<PAGE>   18

WE DO NOT PLAN TO PAY DIVIDENDS IN THE FORESEEABLE FUTURE.

     We have not declared or paid any cash dividends on our capital stock since
inception. We intend to retain any future earnings to finance the operation and
expansion of our business and do not anticipate paying any cash dividends in the
foreseeable future.

                           FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

     This prospectus contains forward-looking statements which involve risks and
uncertainties. These forward-looking statements are usually accompanied by words
such as "believes," "anticipates," "plans," "expects" and similar expressions.
Our actual results could differ materially from those expressed or implied by
these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors, including the
risk factors described above and elsewhere in this prospectus.

                                       16
<PAGE>   19

                                USE OF PROCEEDS


     We estimate that we will receive net proceeds from the sale of the shares
of common stock in this offering of $45.4 million, assuming an initial public
offering price of $16.00 per share and after deducting estimated underwriting
discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses. If the underwriters
exercise their over-allotment option in full, we estimate that our net proceeds
will be $48.1 million.


     As of the date of this prospectus, we have not made any specific
expenditure plans with respect to the proceeds of this offering. Therefore, we
cannot specify with certainty the particular uses for the net proceeds to be
received upon completion of this offering. Accordingly, our management will have
significant flexibility in applying the net proceeds of the offering.


     The principal purposes of this offering are to increase our working
capital, to create a public market for our common stock, to facilitate future
access to the public capital markets and to increase our visibility in the
marketplace.


                                DIVIDEND POLICY

     We have never declared or paid any cash dividends on our common stock. We
currently anticipate that we will retain any future earnings for the development
and operation of our business. Accordingly, we do not anticipate declaring or
paying any cash dividends in the foreseeable future.

                                       17
<PAGE>   20

                                 CAPITALIZATION


     The following table sets forth our capitalization as of June 30, 1999 on an
actual basis, on a pro forma basis to reflect our reorganization from an LLC to
a "C" corporation and on a pro forma as adjusted basis to reflect the sale of
3,125,000 shares of common stock by us in this offering at an initial public
offering price of $16.00 per share, after deducting estimated underwriting
discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. Please
see "Use of Proceeds."


     The following table should be read in conjunction with our financial
statements and the notes to those statements included in this prospectus.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                     AS OF JUNE 30, 1999
                                                             -----------------------------------
                                                                                      PRO FORMA
                                                             ACTUAL     PRO FORMA    AS ADJUSTED
                                                                         (UNAUDITED)
                                                                       (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                          <C>        <C>          <C>
Members' equity (deficiency):
  Additional paid-in capital.............................    $ 3,881          --            --
  Accumulated deficit....................................     (5,765)         --            --
                                                             -------     -------      --------
  Total members' equity (deficiency).....................    $(1,884)         --            --
Stockholders' equity (deficiency):
  Common stock, $0.001 par value: 100,000,000 shares
     authorized on a pro forma basis, 10,819,335 shares
     outstanding on a pro forma basis, and 13,944,335
     shares outstanding on a pro forma as adjusted
     basis...............................................         --          11            14
  Additional paid-in capital.............................         --      (1,895)       43,502
  Accumulated deficit....................................         --          --            --
                                                             -------     -------      --------
  Total stockholders' equity (deficiency)................         --      (1,884)       43,516
                                                             -------     -------      --------
          Total capitalization...........................    $(1,884)    $(1,884)     $ 43,516
                                                             =======     =======      ========
</TABLE>

     The table above excludes 2,386,856 shares of common stock issuable upon the
exercise of stock options outstanding as of June 30, 1999, with a weighted
average exercise price of $2.41 per share. See "Management -- 1997 Option Plan."
In addition, this table excludes 174,492 shares of common stock issuable upon
the exercise of non-plan options, with a weighted average exercise price of
$0.85 per share.

                                       18
<PAGE>   21

                                    DILUTION


     Our net tangible book value (deficit) as of June 30, 1999 was approximately
$(1,924,060), or $(0.18) per share of common stock. Net tangible book value per
share is determined by dividing the amount of our total tangible assets less
total liabilities by the weighted average pro forma number of shares of common
stock outstanding at that date. The pro forma weighted average number of shares
of common stock outstanding gives effect to the Company's reorganization from an
LLC to a "C" corporation as though the reorganization had occurred as of June
30, 1999. Dilution in net tangible book value per share represents the
difference between the amount per share paid by purchasers of shares of common
stock in this offering and the net tangible book value per share of common stock
immediately after the completion of this offering.


     After giving effect to the issuance and sale of the shares of common stock
offered by us at an estimated initial public offering price of $16.00 per share
and after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and
estimated offering expenses payable by us, and the application of the estimated
net proceeds from this offering, our pro forma net tangible book value as of
June 30, 1999 would have been $43,475,940 or $3.12 per share. This represents an
immediate increase in pro forma net tangible book value to our existing
stockholders of $3.30 per share and an immediate dilution to purchasers in this
offering of $12.88 per share. If the initial public offering price is higher or
lower, the dilution to purchasers in this offering will be greater or less,
respectively.

     The following table illustrates this per share dilution:

<TABLE>
<S>                                                           <C>       <C>
Assumed initial public offering price per share.............            $16.00
  Net tangible book value per share at June 30, 1999........  $(0.18)
  Increase in pro forma net tangible book value per share
     attributable to this offering..........................    3.30
                                                              ------
Pro forma net tangible book value per share after this
  offering..................................................              3.12
                                                                        ------
Dilution per share to new investors.........................            $12.88
                                                                        ======
</TABLE>


     Assuming the exercise in full of the underwriters' over-allotment option,
our adjusted pro forma net tangible book value at June 30, 1999 would have been
approximately $3.21 per share, representing an immediate increase in pro forma
net tangible book value of $3.39 per share to our existing stockholders and an
immediate dilution in pro forma net tangible book value of $12.79 per share to
purchasers in this offering.


     The following table summarizes, on a pro forma basis, as of June 30, 1999,
the differences between the number of shares of common stock purchased from us,
the aggregate cash consideration paid to us and the average price per share paid
by existing stockholders and new investors purchasing shares of common stock in
this offering. The calculation below is based on an assumed initial public
offering price of $16.00 per share, before deducting estimated underwriting
discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                   SHARES PURCHASED       TOTAL CONSIDERATION
                                 --------------------    ---------------------    AVERAGE PRICE
                                   NUMBER     PERCENT      AMOUNT      PERCENT      PER SHARE
<S>                              <C>          <C>        <C>           <C>        <C>
Existing stockholders..........  10,819,335     77.6%    $ 4,179,067      7.7%       $ 0.39
New investors..................   3,125,000     22.4      50,000,000     92.3         16.00
                                 ----------    -----     -----------   ------        ------
Total..........................  13,944,335    100.0%    $54,179,067    100.0%       $ 3.89
                                 ==========    =====     ===========   ======        ======
</TABLE>


     If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, the
number of shares of common stock held by existing stockholders will be reduced
to 10,534,335 or 74.6% of the total number of shares of common stock to be
outstanding after this offering. In addition, the number of shares of common
stock held by the new investors will be increased to 3,593,750 or 25.4% of the
total number of shares of common stock to be outstanding immediately after this
offering.


                                       19
<PAGE>   22


     This discussion and table assume no exercise of any stock options
outstanding as of June 30, 1999. As of June 30, 1999, there were options
outstanding to purchase a total of 2,386,856 shares of common stock with a
weighted average exercise price of $2.41 per share. This discussion and table
also exclude 174,492 shares of common stock issuable upon the exercise of
non-plan options, with a weighted average exercise price of $0.85 per share. To
the extent that any of these options are exercised, there will be further
dilution to new investors. Please see "Capitalization."


                                       20
<PAGE>   23

                     SELECTED FINANCIAL AND OPERATING DATA

     The selected balance sheet data as of December 31, 1997 and 1998 and the
selected statement of operations data for the years ended December 31, 1996,
1997 and 1998 have been derived from our audited financial statements included
in this prospectus. The selected balance sheet data as of December 31, 1995 and
1996, and the statement of operations data for 1995, have been derived from our
audited financial statements not included in this prospectus. The selected
balance sheet data as of December 31, 1994 and selected statement of operations
data for the period from December 1, 1994 (inception) to December 31, 1994 have
not been presented as this information is considered to be immaterial. The
selected balance sheet data as of June 30, 1999 and the selected statement of
operations data for the six months ended June 30, 1998 and 1999 are derived from
unaudited financial statements included in this prospectus. In the opinion of
management, the interim data have been prepared on the same basis as the audited
financial statements appearing in this prospectus and include all necessary
adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, we believe to be
necessary for a fair presentation of the data. You should read these selected
financial data in conjunction with "Management's Discussion and Analysis of
Financial Condition and Results of Operations," our financial statements and the
notes to those statements included in the prospectus.


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                   SIX MONTHS ENDED
                                                   YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,             JUNE 30,
                                             -----------------------------------   -----------------
                                              1995     1996     1997      1998      1998      1999
                                                                                      (UNAUDITED)
                                                      (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
<S>                                          <C>      <C>      <C>       <C>       <C>       <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenues:
  Strategic Planning Services..............  $  237   $  566   $ 1,850   $ 6,183   $ 1,995   $ 8,166
  Conferences..............................   2,024    2,686     3,426     4,890     1,979     4,553
  Other....................................   1,439    3,000     3,246     3,729     1,939     1,681
                                             ------   ------   -------   -------   -------   -------
     Total revenues........................   3,700    6,252     8,522    14,802     5,913    14,400
Cost of services and fulfillment...........   2,893    4,687     6,259     9,676     4,282     6,854
                                             ------   ------   -------   -------   -------   -------
     Gross profit..........................     807    1,565     2,263     5,126     1,631     7,546
Other operating expenses:
  Sales and marketing......................     254      514     1,558     3,173     1,313     4,008
  General and administrative...............   1,025    1,664     2,955     4,090     1,918     3,668
                                             ------   ------   -------   -------   -------   -------
     Total other operating expenses........   1,279    2,178     4,513     7,263     3,231     7,676
                                             ------   ------   -------   -------   -------   -------
Net loss...................................  $ (472)  $ (613)  $(2,250)  $(2,137)  $(1,600)  $  (130)
                                             ======   ======   =======   =======   =======   =======
Pro forma basic and diluted net loss per
  common share (1).........................                              $ (0.21)  $ (0.16)  $ (0.01)
                                                                         =======   =======   =======
Pro forma weighted average common shares
  outstanding (1)..........................                               10,318    10,318    10,455
</TABLE>


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                     AS OF DECEMBER 31,             AS OF JUNE 30,
                                             -----------------------------------   -----------------
                                              1995     1996     1997      1998      1998      1999
<S>                                          <C>      <C>      <C>       <C>       <C>       <C>
SELECTED OPERATING DATA:
Number of SPS contracts....................      13       66       145       421       219       654
Total contract value (in thousands)........  $  315   $  923   $ 2,509   $11,666   $ 5,089   $22,138
Number of employees........................      18       61        88       142       117       194
Capital expenditures (in thousands)........  $   99   $  199   $   207   $   838   $   258   $ 2,263
</TABLE>

                                       21
<PAGE>   24

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                            AS OF
                                                         AS OF DECEMBER 31,                JUNE 30,
                                                -------------------------------------    ------------
                                                1995      1996       1997      1998          1999
                                                                                         (UNAUDITED)
                                                                   (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                             <C>      <C>        <C>       <C>        <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Cash and cash equivalents.....................  $   4    $     8    $1,614    $   216      $ 1,554
Working capital (2)...........................   (572)    (1,166)     (553)    (3,376)      (4,972)
Total assets..................................    907      1,474     3,463      6,867       15,051
Members'/stockholders' equity (deficiency)....   (405)      (714)        9     (2,129)      (1,884)
</TABLE>

- ------------------------------

(1) Pro forma basic and diluted net loss per common share is computed by
    dividing net loss by the pro forma weighted average number of shares of
    common stock. Pro forma weighted average number of shares of common stock
    gives effect to our reorganization from an LLC to a "C" corporation as
    though the reorganization had occurred as of the beginning of each period
    indicated. Pro forma weighted average shares do not include any common stock
    equivalents because inclusion of common stock equivalents would have been
    anti-dilutive.


(2) Our working capital balances are typically negative because of the timing of
    cash collections from clients. SPS contracts are typically annual and paid
    in advance. Accordingly, a substantial portion of our billings is initially
    recorded as deferred revenue and amortized into revenue during the term of
    the contract to which such billings relate.

                                       22
<PAGE>   25

          MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION
                           AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

     You should read the following discussion of our financial condition and
results of operations together with our financial statements, the notes to those
statements and the other information in this prospectus. This discussion
contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Please
see "Risk Factors."

OVERVIEW


     We provide research on Internet commerce. Senior executives at our client
companies utilize our research to make informed business decisions in a complex
and rapidly changing Internet economy. Our research, which is focused solely on
the Internet economy, provides our clients with comprehensive views of industry
trends, forecasts and best practices. Our analysis, supported by proprietary
data, emphasizes specific, actionable findings.


     Our revenues consist of SPS, conferences and other revenues. For the six
months ended June 30, 1999, SPS represented approximately 56.7% of our total
revenues. SPS is a combination of proprietary written analysis, supporting data
and access to our analysts. We typically bill clients annually in advance and
deliver the products and services over the term of the contract. We also produce
a wide range of conferences which offer senior executives the opportunity to
hear first-hand the insights of our analysts and the leading decision makers in
the Internet and technology industries. Conference revenues consist of revenues
from individual attendees, sponsors, which display their logo in our conference
program and/or host a reception, and exhibitors, which receive a booth to
promote their companies. For the six months ended June 30, 1999, conferences
represented approximately 31.6% of our total revenues. Other revenues, which
consist primarily of book-length studies, newsletters and custom research,
represented approximately 11.7% of our total revenues for the six months ended
June 30, 1999.

     SPS contracts are renewable contracts, typically annual, and payable in
advance. Accordingly, a substantial portion of our billings is initially
recorded as deferred revenue and amortized into revenue over the term of the
contract. Commission expense related to SPS is also initially deferred and
amortized into expense over the contract period in which the related revenues
are earned and amortized to income. Our contracts are non-cancelable and
non-refundable. Billings attributable to our conferences and other products and
services are initially recorded as deferred revenue and recognized upon the
completion of the event or project.


     We have experienced rapid growth since our organization, and particularly
since our decision in late 1996 to focus our business on SPS. Between 1995 and
1998, our total revenues have grown from $3.7 million to $14.8 million, a
compound annual growth rate of 59.2%. For the six months ended June 30, 1999,
our revenues were $14.4 million, representing an increase of 143.5% over
revenues of $5.9 million for the six months ended June 30, 1998. The number of
our SPS contracts has increased from 145 as of December 31, 1997 to 654 as of
June 30, 1999. Our total contract value has increased from $2.5 million on
December 31, 1997 to $22.1 million on June 30, 1999. We believe that total
contract value is a meaningful measure of the volume of our business. Total
contract value represents the annualized value of all outstanding SPS contracts
without regard to the remaining duration of such contracts. Total contract
value, however, does not necessarily correlate to deferred revenue. Deferred
revenue represents unamortized revenue remaining on all outstanding and billed
contracts. As of June 30, 1999, deferred revenue related to SPS contracts
totaled $11.5 million, which was 51.9% of our total contract value as of such
date.



     To date, a substantial portion of expiring SPS contracts have been renewed
for an equal or higher amount. Approximately 73% of contracts expiring during
the 12 months ended June 30, 1999 were renewed and approximately 96% of these
contracts were renewed for an equal or larger dollar amount.


                                       23
<PAGE>   26

With this high customer renewal rate, we believe we have a growing base of
recurring revenues from SPS. However, this renewal rate is not necessarily
indicative of the rate of future retention of our revenue base.

     We have a highly diversified client base, including companies in the
Internet, media, telecommunications, technology, financial services, retail,
travel, consumer products and professional services industries. No client
accounts for more than 2% of our total annual revenues.

     Cost of services and fulfillment represents the costs associated with
production and delivery of our products and services, including the costs of
salaries, bonuses and related benefits for our research and conference
personnel, all associated editorial, travel and support services, and the costs
of producing our conferences. Sales and marketing expenses include salaries,
bonuses, employee benefits, travel expenses, promotional costs, sales
commissions and other costs incurred in marketing and selling our products and
services. General and administrative expenses include the costs of our finance
and technology groups and other administrative functions.

     We have incurred net losses since our formation. Our net loss was $613,000
in 1996, $2.3 million in 1997, $2.1 million in 1998 and $130,000 for the six
months ended June 30, 1999. We expect to incur a net loss for the full year
1999. As of June 30, 1999, we had an accumulated deficit of $5.8 million. We
expect to incur significant expenditures in the future associated with our
domestic and international expansion strategies. In particular, we intend to
continue to expand our research and sales personnel, and we intend to continue
to invest in technology, leasehold improvements and the development of
additional research practices and modules.

RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

     The following table sets forth our results of operations for the years
ended December 31, 1996, 1997 and 1998 and the six months ended June 30, 1998
and 1999, expressed as a percentage of revenue:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                               SIX MONTHS ENDED
                                                  YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,          JUNE 30,
                                                 -------------------------     -----------------
                                                 1996      1997      1998       1998       1999
                                                                                  (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                              <C>       <C>       <C>       <C>        <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenues:
  Strategic Planning Services..................    9.0%     21.7%     41.8%     33.7%      56.7%
  Conferences..................................   43.0      40.2      33.0      33.5       31.6
  Other........................................   48.0      38.1      25.2      32.8       11.7
                                                 -----     -----     -----     -----      -----
          Total revenues.......................  100.0     100.0     100.0     100.0      100.0
Cost of services and fulfillment...............   75.0      73.4      65.4      72.4       47.6
                                                 -----     -----     -----     -----      -----
  Gross profit.................................   25.0      26.6      34.6      27.6       52.4
Other operating expenses:
  Sales and marketing..........................    8.2      18.3      21.4      22.2       27.8
  General and administrative...................   26.6      34.7      27.6      32.4       25.5
                                                 -----     -----     -----     -----      -----
          Total other operating expenses.......   34.8      53.0      49.0      54.6       53.3
                                                 -----     -----     -----     -----      -----
Net loss.......................................   (9.8)%   (26.4)%   (14.4)%   (27.0)%     (0.9)%
                                                 =====     =====     =====     =====      =====
</TABLE>

  COMPARISON OF SIX MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1999 AND 1998

     Revenues.  Total revenues increased 143.5% to $14.4 million in the six
months ended June 30, 1999 from $5.9 million in the six months ended June 30,
1998. SPS revenues increased 309.3% to $8.2 million

                                       24
<PAGE>   27

in the six months ended June 30, 1999 from $2.0 million in the six months ended
June 30, 1998. This increase is attributable primarily to an increase in the
number of SPS contracts to 654 at June 30, 1999 from 219 at June 30, 1998 and an
increase in average contract value to $33,850 at June 30, 1999 from $23,235 at
June 30, 1998. These increases reflect an increase in the number of users at,
and research services purchased by, our client companies. Total contract value
increased to $22.1 million at June 30, 1999 from $5.1 million at June 30, 1998.

     Conference revenues increased 130.1% to $4.6 million in the six months
ended June 30, 1999 from $2.0 million in the six months ended June 30, 1998.
These revenues reflect the results of four conferences in the six months ended
June 30, 1998 and five conferences in the six months ended June 30, 1999. The
increase is attributable to an increase in attendee, sponsor and exhibitor
revenues and the production of an additional conference in the six months ended
June 30, 1999.

     Other revenues decreased 13.3% to $1.7 million in the six months ended June
30, 1999 from $1.9 million in the six months ended June 30, 1998. This decrease
reflects our decision to focus our business on SPS.

     Cost of Services and Fulfillment.  Cost of services and fulfillment
increased 60.1% to $6.9 million in the six months ended June 30, 1999 from $4.3
million in the six months ended June 30, 1998. The increase in this period was
attributable to the overall growth of our business, in particular the increased
research staffing for new and existing research practices. Gross margin
increased to 52.4% in the six months ended June 30, 1999 from 27.6% in the six
months ended June 30, 1998 because the growth in our client base and new
business exceeded the growth in the cost of providing our research services and
conferences.

     Sales and Marketing.  Sales and marketing expenses increased 205.2% to $4.0
million in the six months ended June 30, 1999 from $1.3 million in the six
months ended June 30, 1998. As a percentage of total revenues, these expenses
increased to 27.8% in the six months ended June 30, 1999 from 22.2% in the six
months ended June 30, 1998. The increase in this period was primarily
attributable to an increased number of sales personnel and the corresponding
commission costs associated with increased revenues.


     General and Administrative.  General and administrative expenses increased
91.2% to $3.7 million in the six months ended June 30, 1999 from $1.9 million in
the six months ended June 30, 1998. The increase in this period was primarily
attributable to increased personnel for the finance, human resources and
operations areas, as well as costs associated with our new London office and
higher costs for staff travel and professional fees. As a percentage of total
revenues, these expenses decreased to 25.5% in the six months ended June 30,
1999 from 32.4% in the six months ended June 30, 1998. This decrease reflects
the fact that some of these expenses, such as leasehold expenses, did not
increase at the same rate as our revenues.


  COMPARISON OF THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1998, 1997 AND 1996

     Revenues.  Total revenues increased 73.7% to $14.8 million in 1998 from
$8.5 million in 1997 and 36.3% to $8.5 million in 1997 from $6.3 million in
1996. SPS revenues increased by 234.2% to $6.2 million in 1998 from $1.9 million
in 1997. This increase is attributable primarily to an increase in the number of
SPS contracts to 421 at December 31, 1998 from 145 at December 31, 1997 and an
increase in average contract value to $27,700 at December 31, 1998 from $17,300
at December 31, 1997. SPS revenues increased by 227.1% to $1.9 million in 1997
from $566,000 in 1996. This increase is attributable primarily to an increase in
the number of SPS contracts to 145 at December 31, 1997 from 66 at December 31,
1996 and an increase in average contract value to $17,300 at December 31, 1997
from $14,000 at December 31, 1996.

                                       25
<PAGE>   28

     The increase in SPS revenues in these periods reflects an increase in the
number of users at, and research services purchased by, our client companies.
Total contract value increased to $11.7 million at December 31, 1998 from $2.5
million at December 31, 1997 and $923,000 at December 31, 1996.

     Conference revenues increased 42.7% to $4.9 million in 1998 from $3.4
million in 1997 and 27.6% to $3.4 million in 1997 from $2.7 million in 1996.
These increases are attributable to an increase both in the number of
conferences and in average attendee, sponsor and exhibitor revenues.

     Other revenues increased 14.9% to $3.7 million in 1998 from $3.2 million in
1997. This increase reflects an increase in revenues from custom research and
book-length studies, offset in part by a small decrease in newsletter revenues.
Other revenues increased 8.2% to $3.2 million in 1997 from $3.0 million in 1996.
This increase reflects an increase in revenues from book-length studies and
newsletter subscriptions, offset in part by a decrease in custom research.

     Cost of Services and Fulfillment.  Cost of services and fulfillment
increased 54.6% to $9.7 million in 1998 from $6.3 million in 1997. The increase
in this period was attributable to the overall growth of our business, in
particular the increased research staffing for new and existing research
practices. These expenses increased 33.5% to $6.3 million in 1997 from $4.7
million in 1996. The increase in this period was attributable to increased costs
for producing conferences and other direct products, and for increases in
research staffing. Gross margin increased to 34.6% in 1998 from 26.6% in 1997
and increased to 26.6% in 1997 from 25.0% in 1996 because the growth in our
client base and new business exceeded the growth in the cost of providing our
research services and conferences.

     Sales and Marketing.  Sales and marketing expenses increased 103.7% to $3.2
million in 1998 from $1.6 million in 1997. The increase in this period was
primarily attributable to an increased number of sales personnel and the
corresponding commission costs associated with increased revenues. Sales and
marketing expenses increased 202.7% to $1.6 million in 1997 from $514,000 in
1996. The expense increase in this period was primarily attributable to
increased personnel in the marketing area to support an increased direct mail
effort. As a percentage of total revenues, these expenses increased to 21.4% in
1998 from 18.3% in 1997 and increased to 18.3% in 1997 from 8.2% in 1996.


     General and Administrative.  General and administrative expenses increased
38.4% to $4.1 million in 1998 from $3.0 million in 1997 and 77.7% to $3.0
million in 1997 from $1.7 million in 1996. The increase in these periods was
primarily attributable to increased staffing for the finance, human resources
and operations areas, as well as increased expenses associated with basic office
operations, including rent, utilities, travel and printing. As a percentage of
total revenues, these expenses decreased to 27.6% in 1998 from 34.7% in 1997 and
increased to 34.7% in 1997 from 26.6% in 1996.


INCOME TAXES

     No provision or benefit for federal or state income taxes, actual or pro
forma, has been recorded for the net operating losses we incurred in the years
ended December 31, 1996, 1997 and 1998. In addition, no net operating losses
incurred in 1999 prior to the closing of this offering will be recorded on our
federal or state tax returns. Because our company was a limited liability
company for tax purposes during these periods, and will continue to be until the
closing of this offering, all taxable losses were, and will be, allocated to the
members for reporting on their income tax returns. As a result, we will not be
able to offset future taxable income, if any, against losses incurred prior to
the closing of this offering.

QUARTERLY RESULTS OF OPERATIONS DATA

     The following tables sets forth unaudited quarterly statement of operations
data for each of the six quarters ended June 30, 1999 and such data expressed as
a percentage of total revenues. We believe that

                                       26
<PAGE>   29

we have prepared these data on the same basis as our audited financial
statements in this prospectus, and have included all necessary adjustments,
consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair
presentation of our results of operations for these interim periods. You should
read these interim financial data together with our audited financial statements
and the notes to those statements in this prospectus. Our historical results of
operations do not necessarily indicate the results of operations we will achieve
in the future, and our results of operations for interim periods do not
necessarily indicate the results of operations for any future period. Our
results of operations may fluctuate significantly in the future as a result of a
variety of factors, many of which are beyond our control. See "Risk Factors--Our
operating results may fluctuate in future periods which may cause volatility or
a decline in the price of our stock."

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   MARCH 31,    JUNE 30,   SEPTEMBER 30,   DECEMBER 31,   MARCH 31,    JUNE 30,
                                     1998         1998         1998            1998         1999         1999
                                                                  (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                <C>          <C>        <C>             <C>            <C>          <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenues:
  Strategic Planning Services....   $   762      $1,233       $1,757          $2,431       $3,447       $4,719
  Conferences....................       888       1,091        2,354             557        1,724        2,829
  Other..........................       959         980        1,014             776          848          833
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
          Total revenues.........     2,609       3,304        5,125           3,764        6,019        8,381
Cost of services and
  fulfillment....................     2,091       2,191        3,127           2,267        2,955        3,899
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
  Gross profit...................       518       1,113        1,998           1,497        3,064        4,482
Other operating expenses:
  Sales and marketing............       611         702          842           1,018        1,750        2,258
  General and administrative.....       911       1,007        1,132           1,040        1,635        2,033
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
          Total other operating
            expenses.............     1,522       1,709        1,974           2,058        3,385        4,291
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
Net income (loss)................   $(1,004)     $ (596)      $   24          $ (561)      $ (321)      $  191
                                    =======      ======       ======          ======       ======       ======
</TABLE>

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                   ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   MARCH 31,    JUNE 30,   SEPTEMBER 30,   DECEMBER 31,   MARCH 31,    JUNE 30,
                                     1998         1998         1998            1998         1999         1999
<S>                                <C>          <C>        <C>             <C>            <C>          <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenues:
  Strategic Planning Services....      29.2%       37.3%        34.3%           64.6%        57.3%        56.3%
  Conferences....................      34.0        33.0         45.9            14.8         28.6         33.7
  Other..........................      36.8        29.7         19.8            20.6         14.1         10.0
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
          Total revenues.........     100.0       100.0        100.0           100.0        100.0        100.0
Cost of services and
  fulfillment....................      80.2        66.3         61.0            60.2         49.1         46.5
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
  Gross profit...................      19.8        33.7         39.0            39.8         50.9         53.5
Other operating expenses:
  Sales and marketing............      23.4        21.2         16.4            27.1         29.0         26.9
  General and administrative.....      34.9        30.5         22.1            27.6         27.2         24.3
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
          Total other operating
            expenses.............      58.3        51.7         38.5            54.7         56.2         51.2
                                    -------      ------       ------          ------       ------       ------
Net income (loss)................     (38.5)%     (18.0)%        0.5%          (14.9)%       (5.3)%        2.3%
                                    =======      ======       ======          ======       ======       ======
</TABLE>

                                       27
<PAGE>   30

SEASONALITY

     Our conference revenues historically have been strongest during the third
quarter of the year, in which the largest number of our events are held. We also
have experienced a significant increase in SPS sales during the fourth quarter
of the year due primarily to the budget cycles of our SPS clients, the renewal
dates of existing SPS contracts and the effect of our annual sales quotas.

LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES

     We have financed our operations since our organization on December 1, 1994
with a total of $4.2 million in member contributions. This includes $3.0 million
in private equity from Gartner Group in October 1997.

     Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities was $14,000 for the
year ended December 31, 1996, $(1.1) million for the year ended December 31,
1997, $(557,000) for the year ended December 31, 1998 and $3.2 million for the
six months ended June 30, 1999.

     Net cash used in investing activities was $257,000 in 1996, $232,000 in
1997, $838,000 in 1998 and $2.3 million for the six months ended June 30, 1999.
Investments were primarily in computer equipment, furniture and leasehold
improvements.

     Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities was $246,000 for the
year ended December 31, 1996, $2.9 million for the year ended December 31, 1997,
$(3,000) for the year ended December 31, 1998 and $375,000 for the six months
ended June 30, 1999. Cash provided by financing activities for the year ended
December 31, 1997 primarily resulted from the placement of private equity with
Gartner Group. In addition, during the six months ended June 30, 1999 two equity
members exercised unit investment options for $375,000.


     As of June 30, 1999, we had $1.6 million in cash and cash equivalents. We
have a $3.0 million committed line of credit, secured by substantially all of
our assets, under which there were no outstanding balances as of June 30, 1999.



     We expect to spend approximately $4 million in 1999 and $7 million in 2000
on technology, including Web site enhancements, leasehold improvements,
expansion of operations and telecommunications upgrades. We anticipate that we
will continue to increase our capital expenditures and lease commitments
consistent with our anticipated growth in operations, infrastructure and
personnel. We also anticipate that we will continue to experience growth in our
operating expenses to support our revenue growth, including the continued
introduction of new practices and modules. While we are not dependent on the
proceeds of this offering to fund our operations for the next 12 months, we
believe that the proceeds of this offering will be necessary to fund the
long-term growth of our company.



     Our financial exposure due to the effects of fluctuations in foreign
currency rates is not material.


YEAR 2000 COMPLIANCE

     The Year 2000 problem is the result of computer programs being written
using two digits rather than four to identify a given year. Computer programs
that have time-sensitive software may interpret the date code "00" as the year
1900 rather than the year 2000. This could result in a disruption of operations
including a temporary inability to process transactions, send invoices or engage
in other normal business activities. We maintain a significant number of
computer software systems and operating systems across our entire organization
which are potentially subject to Year 2000 problems.

     Our Year 2000 concerns cover internal and external application and database
production software, internal and external production hardware, internal
infrastructure and external agents.

     Internal and external application and database production software includes
all software used either directly by our clients or indirectly in support of our
clients. We have upgraded or replaced all of these

                                       28
<PAGE>   31

systems. All of the systems are designed to pass Year 2000 compliance tests.
System testing for Year 2000 compliance is anticipated to be completed by the
end of the third quarter of 1999.

     Internal and external production hardware includes the hardware that we use
to directly host our Web site, our internal servers and network hardware and our
desktop systems. We have upgraded or replaced all hardware in direct support of
our Web site. We will upgrade or replace all internal servers, network hardware
and desktop systems by the end of the third quarter of 1999.

     Internal infrastructure consists of all hardware and software not described
above which is used in support of our internal staff. This includes all printers
and modems, the phone and voicemail systems and any common office automation
devices, including faxes and copiers. We upgraded the phone system in the second
quarter of 1999 and we will replace the voicemail system in the third quarter of
1999. We have upgraded or replaced all printers and modems. We will upgrade or
replace common office automation devices by the end of the third quarter of
1999.

     External agents includes all critical hardware, software and related
systems provided by third parties. Beginning in the second quarter of 1999, we
identified critical suppliers and equipment that we depend on for our day to day
business and surveyed these external vendors as to their Year 2000 compliance.
All of our critical external vendors have responded to our Year 2000 compliance
inquiries. 85% of these external vendors have indicated that they are Year 2000
compliant, 10% have indicated that they are in the process of upgrading or
replacing their systems and 5% have indicated that they are in the process of
assessing whether their systems are Year 2000 compliant. We keep a copy of all
third party Year 2000 compliance statements that we obtain.

     We expect that our employees will perform all significant work for the Year
2000 projects described above. We do not anticipate hiring any additional
employees nor do we anticipate incurring any significant consulting expenses for
the Year 2000 project. The cost of software tools and consulting expenses used
for detection of Year 2000 problems is not currently expected to exceed
$100,000.

     Contingency planning has not yet begun for all categories. We believe that
all critical systems are Year 2000 compliant as of September 1, 1999.

     The failure to correct a material Year 2000 problem could result in an
interruption in, or a failure of, various normal business activities or
operations. Such failures could materially and adversely affect our results of
operations, liquidity and financial condition, and subject us to the risk of
litigation. Due to the general uncertainty inherent in the Year 2000 problem,
resulting in part from the uncertainty of the Year 2000 readiness of third-party
suppliers and customers, we are unable to determine at this time whether the
consequences of Year 2000 failures will have a material impact on our results of
operations, liquidity or financial condition.

     In addition, we cannot assure you that governmental agencies, utility
companies, internet access companies, third party service providers and others
outside our control will be Year 2000 compliant. The failure by those entities
to be Year 2000 compliant could result in a systematic failure beyond our
control, such as prolonged internet, telecommunications or electrical failure,
which could prevent us from providing our services or prevent users from
accessing our services.

RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

     In April 1998, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
issued Statement of Position 98-1, "Accounting for the Costs of Computer
Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use" ("SOP 98-1"), which provides
guidance for determining whether computer software is internal-use software and
on accounting for the proceeds of computer software originally developed or
obtained for internal use and then subsequently sold to the public. It also
provides guidance on capitalization of the costs incurred for computer software
developed or obtained for internal use. SOP 98-1 will be effective for our
fiscal year ending December 31, 1999. The adoption of SOP 98-1 is not expected
to have a material impact on our financial statements.

                                       29
<PAGE>   32

     In April 1998, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
issued Statement of Position 98-5, "Reporting on the Costs of Start-Up
Activities" ("SOP 98-5"), which provides guidance on the financial reporting of
start-up costs and organization costs. It requires costs of start-up activities
and organization costs to be expensed as incurred. SOP 98-5 will be effective
for our fiscal year ending December 31, 1999. The adoption of SOP 98-5 is not
expected to have a material impact on our financial statements.

     In June 1997, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ("FASB") issued
Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 131, "Disclosures About Segments
of an Enterprise and Related Information" ("SFAS No. 131"), which establishes
standards for the way that a public enterprise reports information about
operating segments in annual financial statements, and requires that those
enterprises report selected information about operating segments in interim
financial reports issued to shareholders. It also establishes standards for
related disclosures about products and services, geographic areas and major
customers. SFAS No. 131 is effective for fiscal years beginning after December
15, 1997, and requires restatement of earlier periods presented. In the initial
year of application, comparative information for earlier years must be restated.
We have determined that we do not have any separately reportable business
segments.


     In June 1997, the FASB issued SFAS No. 130, "Reporting Comprehensive
Income" ("SFAS No. 130"), which establishes standards for the reporting and
display of comprehensive income and its components in a full set of general
purpose financial statements. Comprehensive income generally represents all
changes in shareholders' equity during the period except those resulting from
investments by, or distributions to, shareholders. SFAS No. 130 is effective for
fiscal years beginning after December 15, 1997 and requires restatement of
earlier periods presented. The adoption of this standard has had no impact on
our financial statements. Accordingly, our comprehensive net loss is equal to
our net loss for all periods presented.


     In June 1998, the FASB issued SFAS No. 133, "Accounting for Derivative
Instruments and Hedging Activities" ("SFAS No. 133"), which establishes
accounting and reporting standards for derivative instruments, including
derivative instruments embedded in other contracts, and for hedging activities.
SFAS No. 133 is effective for all fiscal quarters of fiscal years beginning
after June 15, 2000. This statement is not expected to affect us as we currently
do not engage or plan to engage in derivative instruments or hedging activities.

                                       30
<PAGE>   33

                                    BUSINESS

OVERVIEW


     We provide research on Internet commerce. Senior executives at client
companies utilize our research to make informed business decisions in a complex
and rapidly changing Internet economy. Our research, which is focused solely on
the Internet economy, provides our clients with comprehensive views of industry
trends, forecasts and best practices. Our analysis, supported by proprietary
data, emphasizes specific, actionable findings.



     Our research services are provided primarily through our continuous
subscription product, Strategic Planning Services, which we call SPS. SPS is a
combination of proprietary written analysis, supporting data and access to our
analysts. We typically bill clients annually in advance and deliver the products
and services over the term of the contract. We generate our research through
eight focused teams of research analysts and associates. Our proprietary
research is informed and supported by a dedicated data research group. We
increasingly deliver our products via the Internet.



     We have a highly diversified client base, including companies in the
Internet, media, telecommunications, technology, financial services, retail,
travel, consumer products and professional services industries. We have
successfully increased the number of SPS clients and our total contract value,
which is the annualized value of all SPS contracts at a given point in time. As
of June 30, 1999, we had 654 SPS contracts, an increase from 421 on December 31,
1998 and 145 on December 31, 1997. Our total contract value has increased from
$2.5 million on December 31, 1997, to $11.7 million on December 31, 1998 and to
$22.1 million on June 30, 1999. In addition, approximately 73% of the SPS
contracts that expired during the 12 months prior to June 30, 1999 were renewed.



     We also produce a wide range of conferences which offer senior executives
the opportunity to hear first-hand the insights of our analysts and the leading
decision makers in the Internet and technology industries. Because over 75% of
the attendees are not SPS clients, these conferences provide a unique
opportunity to promote our SPS research to potential clients. These conferences
also allow us to increase the public profile of our analysts, generate favorable
press and otherwise promote the Jupiter brand.



     Our revenues have increased from $8.5 million in 1997 to $14.8 million in
1998, and from $5.9 million in the six months ended June 30, 1998 to $14.4
million in the six months ended June 30, 1999. We have a limited operating
history, however, and have incurred net losses since our formation. As of June
30, 1999, we had an accumulated deficit of $5.8 million.


MARKET OPPORTUNITY

  The Growth of Internet Commerce

     The Internet has emerged as a global medium that allows hundreds of
millions of people worldwide to obtain information, communicate and conduct
business electronically. The continued growth in Internet usage will be driven
by:

     - the large and growing number of personal computers installed in homes and
       offices;

     - easier, faster, more reliable and less expensive access to the Internet;

     - the availability of more and better content on the Internet;

     - improvements in network infrastructure; and

     - the increasing ability to access the Internet with devices like
       television and telephones.

     As the use of the Internet grows, businesses are increasing the breadth and
depth of their Internet products and services geared to consumers and other
businesses. Companies are also increasingly utilizing the Internet for functions
critical to their core business strategies and operations, such as sales and
marketing, customer service, supply chain management and overall project
coordination. As a result, numerous companies, including software development
firms, telecommunications and technology vendors and marketing and advertising
agencies, have developed products, services and technologies which support
consumers and businesses seeking to expand their use of the Internet or increase
their business efficiency.

     The unique interactive nature of the Internet has also led to its rapid
emergence as a convenient vehicle to buy and sell products and services.
Internet commerce can be fast, inexpensive and convenient, and a growing number
of users have used the Internet to trade securities, purchase goods and services
and
                                       31
<PAGE>   34

pay bills. Retailers, advertisers and marketers have embraced the Internet
because it offers them the ability to:

     - reach broad, global audiences, thereby overcoming the limitations of
       brick-and-mortar businesses;

     - access new revenue streams;

     - target and cost-effectively market to consumers with specific sets of
       interests and desirable demographic characteristics; and

     - improve efficiencies in global corporate communications, supply chain
       management, technology implementation and overall operating expenses.

     We believe that the growth of the Internet, and the growth of Internet
commerce in particular, will continue to expand rapidly for the foreseeable
future both in the United States and abroad. A recent report by University of
Texas' Center for Research in Electronic Commerce estimated that the Internet
economy generated approximately $300 billion in U.S. revenue and was responsible
for 1.2 million jobs as of 1998. A recent study by the Organization for Economic
Cooperation and Development predicted that worldwide Internet commerce may grow
to $1 trillion by 2005. In addition, billion dollar markets are emerging on the
Internet for many different industry sectors.


     The graphs below illustrate our growth projections for various domestic
Internet markets. Our projections are based on a variety of research techniques,
including monthly tracking of online and non-online consumers, surveys of
leading executives at numerous Internet and technology companies, consumer
buying patterns in traditional retail markets and the historical development of
other markets and distribution channels. The figures for travel represent the
amount spent on online travel purchases, including airline tickets and hotels.
The figures for advertising represent the amount spent by businesses for
advertising on the Internet. The figures for shopping represent the amount spent
for online purchases of consumer goods such as books, music and toys.


                  EXPECTED GROWTH OF DOMESTIC INTERNET MARKETS

<TABLE>
                   <S>                                                                 <C>
                             SELECTED INTERNET                                            INDIVIDUAL ONLINE
                             COMMERCE MARKETS                                              INVESTING MARKET
</TABLE>

            [Expected Growth of Domestic Internet Markets Bar Graph]

Source: Jupiter Communications

                                       32
<PAGE>   35

  The Need for Timely, Unbiased and Affordable Advice

     The rapid growth of Internet commerce and the related increase of
innovative products, services and technologies have made it very difficult for
companies to keep pace with technological changes, to compete against new types
of companies and to generate research internally. Over the past few years,
numerous companies have been formed which focus solely on the delivery of
Internet access and online services, Internet commerce solutions and selling
products and services directly over the Internet. The emergence of these
Internet companies and the competitive challenges they pose have forced many
traditional companies, including financial services, telecommunications, media,
retail and consumer products companies, to make significant investments in
developing Internet-related businesses, services and strategies.


     There is tremendous uncertainty and anxiety among all of these types of
companies as to the future growth of Internet commerce and how it will affect
day-to-day decision-making and business development efforts. This uncertainty
and anxiety is not limited to technology personnel but is increasingly shared by
marketing and sales personnel, business development staff, senior executives and
boards of directors. Many companies do not have the technological knowledge or
the financial resources or personnel to research these issues and developments
internally. In addition, the abundance of conflicting information and
predictions regarding the growth of the Internet and the future marketplace are
very difficult for even experienced executives to decipher. Consequently, demand
is growing for timely and credible advice to assist companies in identifying
revenue models and success criteria, analyzing consumer adoption trends and
activity, developing effective sales and marketing operations, assessing market
trends and analyzing the competitive landscape and industry outlook. We expect
that demand for timely and credible advice will increase as use of the Internet
impacts new industries and expands into other geographic areas.


THE JUPITER SOLUTION

     We address the growing demand around the world for advisory research and
analysis on Internet commerce. All of our research is designed to help senior
executives at large and small companies in a wide range of industries make
difficult, complex and informed business decisions in the rapidly changing
Internet economy. Our research identifies revenue models and success criteria;
defines competitive landscapes; analyzes consumer demand for specific products
or Web sites; provides industry forecasts, markets projections and trend
analyses; and assesses the value of strategic partnerships and/or acquisitions.
Our Strategic Planning Services are provided on a subscription basis and
structured as a continuing information service for senior executives focused on
marketing, advertising, media and retail related to Internet commerce.

     Our solution provides the following key advantages:

     - OUR RESEARCH ENABLES SENIOR EXECUTIVES TO MAKE DIFFICULT AND COMPLEX
       BUSINESS DECISIONS.  Our research products and services enable companies
       to understand the rapid changes related to the growth of Internet
       commerce and to evaluate the steps they should take to promote their
       businesses and compete effectively. Our primary goal is to provide
       clients with prescriptive advice and practical business solutions. We
       support our research and analysis with extensive proprietary data,
       including market forecasts, executive surveys and surveys of Internet
       users and households. Our clients also have access to our research
       analysts to address specific business concerns, which enables them to
       make more informed business decisions and allows us to better understand
       and respond to their changing needs. We believe this interaction also
       allows us to sustain a high client retention rate and identify new
       research needs among our clients.


     - WE FOCUS SOLELY ON THE RAPIDLY EVOLVING INTERNET ECONOMY.  Our goal has
       been to position our company as the definitive proprietary resource for
       all Internet development efforts. Unlike companies that focus primarily
       on information technology research, our research addresses the business
       and marketing strategies of companies grappling with Internet commerce.
       We typically cover the impact of new technology on traditional business
       models, the rate of return-on-investment and projections of consumer
       spending, not vendor selection or cost of implementation alone. As a
       result, our prospects and clients include chief executive officers and
       other senior executives, including sales, marketing, business
       development, operations and strategic planning executives.


                                       33
<PAGE>   36


     - OUR RESEARCH ANALYSTS ARE EXPERTS ON INTERNET COMMERCE.  Our analysts
       have years of relevant experience and are recruited from a variety of
       different industries, including management consulting and research firms,
       financial services, publishing, entertainment and advertising. Our
       analysts are frequently quoted in articles on the Internet and Internet
       commerce that appear in major newspapers, magazines and industry
       periodicals. In addition, our analysts are asked to speak at hundreds of
       non-Jupiter industry and corporate events. Because of their expertise,
       our analysts also have personal access to the leading decision makers in
       the Internet economy. We believe that the experience and prominence of
       our analysts allow us to provide original and prescriptive research.



     - WE SUPPLEMENT OUR CORE PRACTICES WITH SPECIALIZED MARKET MODULES.  We
       supplement our eight core practices, which offer broad prescriptive
       advice relevant to all online ventures, with sixteen market modules that
       target specific industries or geographic areas. By addressing market
       forecasts, competitive landscapes and business practices relating to
       specific industries and geographic areas, we are able to offer
       specialized insights to guide senior executives in their daily decision
       making.


     - WE PROVIDE DESKTOP ACCESS TO JUPITER RESEARCH THROUGH OUR WEB SITE.  Our
       Web site is an interactive platform that enables clients to access our
       products and services in a customized, easy-to-use manner. Our Web site
       allows users to search through our research and data libraries, send
       e-mails to client service representatives, access special content
       packages and register for conferences. In addition, our Web site offers
       analyst presentations and audio archives of analyst conference calls
       addressing the research reports that we publish.

OUR STRATEGY

     Our objective is to be the premier global research company focusing on
Internet commerce. Key elements of our business strategy include the following:


     - PROVIDING INNOVATIVE RESEARCH ON INTERNET COMMERCE.  We intend to
       continuously update, expand and refine our practices, market modules and
       data research capabilities to anticipate and meet the changing needs of
       business executives. We expect to continue to add new practices and
       market modules in the future. We also expect to continue to increase the
       number of our analysts and other research professionals.


     - INCREASING OUR CLIENT BASE IN THE UNITED STATES AND ABROAD.  We are
       committed to expanding our client base in the United States and abroad
       even further by expanding our research products and services, increasing
       our sales and marketing initiatives and personnel and focusing on client
       service. We intend to hire additional sales representatives who will be
       located in the targeted sales regions, as well as additional strategic
       account managers who specifically focus on sales to multinational
       companies. We also expect that the rapid changes in the Internet markets
       and our increased international focus will enable us to attract
       additional clients from new industries and geographic areas.

     - INCREASING THE LEVEL OF SALES TO EXISTING CLIENTS.  We are committed to
       increasing the total sales to our existing clients, as well as increasing
       the renewal rates for our SPS contracts. As Internet commerce continues
       to expand around the world, we expect that our existing clients will
       continue to need our research and advice and that they will purchase more
       of our research products. In addition, we intend to actively market all
       of our new practices and market modules to the executives already
       purchasing our products and services and to other executives at our
       current clients.

     - PURSUING INTERNATIONAL OPPORTUNITIES.  The growth of Internet commerce in
       foreign countries will present numerous opportunities for us to expand
       our international operations. We intend to add market modules and
       conferences that focus on specific geographic markets. We also expect to
       expand our London office which focuses on the European market, and we may
       open additional offices in foreign cities. We expect to enter into
       additional international distribution deals and strategic partnerships,
       and we will consider acquisitions of research firms to extend our
       international presence and research coverage.

     - CONTINUING TO STRENGTHEN THE JUPITER BRAND.  While we believe we have
       developed a strong brand name, we intend to engage in extensive public
       relations and marketing efforts to promote our

                                       34
<PAGE>   37

       business in the United States and abroad. These efforts will include an
       advertising campaign, continued enhancements to our Web site and an
       increase in the number of marketing events we sponsor for potential
       clients. We will also focus on expanding our press coverage and the
       exposure of our research analysts on television and at industry events.

     - INCREASING THE NUMBER OF CONFERENCES THAT WE PRODUCE.  We expect to
       expand the number of conferences that we produce, as well as update and
       refine our topics as the marketplace changes. We are currently exploring
       adding four additional conferences in the United States and abroad in
       2000, including new events and regional versions of existing conferences.
       Our conferences offer excellent opportunities to showcase our research to
       potential clients, increase the public profile of our analysts, generate
       favorable press and otherwise promote the Jupiter brand.

     - ENHANCING OUR WEB DELIVERY PLATFORM.  We plan to continually upgrade our
       Web site to enable users to more easily access data, increase
       interactivity and enhance customization of delivery. In the fourth
       quarter of 1999, we plan to upgrade our Web site on a new platform which
       will enable clients to create more personalized views of their content
       and to search across all services more effectively. Our enhanced Web site
       will allow us to more effectively target specific research to clients,
       measure demand for our research and improve our customer service
       capabilities.

STRATEGIC PLANNING SERVICES


     Strategic Planning Services provides our clients with a wide range of
proprietary research, data and advisory analysis and is structured as a
continuous information service. We have designed our SPS research to enable
companies to make intelligent business decisions about Internet commerce and
consumer use of the Internet and related technologies. The core components of
our Strategic Planning Services are eight practices, which focus on issues vital
to all online ventures, and sixteen market modules, which focus on discrete
industries and geographic areas. SPS contracts are renewable on an annual basis.
We also recently introduced our MindShare Senior Executive Program which is
targeted at chief executive officers and other senior executives. MindShare is
structured to combine forward-looking, broad strategic advice with focused
strategy sessions with our analysts. These research products and services
identify revenue models and success criteria, analyze consumer adoption trends
and provide advice, forecasts and industry trends for senior executives focused
on technology, content, advertising, entertainment and merchandising related to
Internet commerce.


     A key component of our Strategic Planning Services is access to our
research analysts for discussions and questions related to their published
reports. Our clients typically seek advice or have questions regarding new
business or marketing initiatives, best practices, new opportunities or
competitive threats, market forecasts and/or the value of mergers and strategic
partnerships. Clients submit inquiries to our dedicated client inquiry staff via
telephone, e-mail or our Web site. The client inquiry staff, which consists of
trained research professionals who are familiar with all of our products and
services, coordinates the responses and actively manages access to the analysts.

     The size of our SPS contracts varies depending on the number of practices
and market modules that are purchased and the number and type of users at the
client company. Some users have interactive access to our research and analysts
and receive hard copies of our research reports while other users only have the
ability to read research reports by accessing our Web site. Each Strategic
Planning Services contract includes at least one practice and passes to our
conferences. Additional practices, market modules and conference passes can be
added at a graduated cost. Participation in our MindShare program is purchased
separately for an annual fee.


     We have successfully expanded the number of clients for our Strategic
Planning Services, retained these clients when their contracts expire and
increased the level of sales to our clients. The number of SPS contracts has
increased from 145 on December 31, 1997, to 421 on December 31, 1998 and to 654
on June 30, 1999. In addition, 73% of the contracts that expired during the 12
months prior to June 30, 1999 were renewed and approximately 96% of these
contracts were renewed for an equal or larger dollar amount. Furthermore, the
average size of our contracts with clients has increased as well. Our average
contract value was approximately $17,300 on December 31, 1997, approximately
$27,700 on December 31,


                                       35
<PAGE>   38

1998 and approximately $33,850 on June 30, 1999. For our fifty largest clients,
the average contract value as of June 30, 1999 was $108,961.

  Practices


     Our practices focus on broad issues, strategies and challenges facing all
companies engaged in Internet commerce. The following is a description of the
practices in our SPS program and a sampling of recent reports published by each
practice:


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  PRACTICE                                     RECENT REPORTS
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                             <C>
  DIGITAL COMMERCE STRATEGIES: Generating       - Determining the Value of Portal Tenancies
  Consumer Transactions. Analyzes the           - Auctions: From Bidding to Billing
  business models of transaction-based sites    - Minipayments: Implementing Transactions
  and services, as well as their supporting     for Small Purchases
  technologies. Focusing on the impact that
  interactivity will have on consumer
  transactions, this practice provides
  actionable advice concerning consumer
  marketing, cost/revenue expectations and
  competitive positioning.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  CONSUMER CONTENT STRATEGIES: Programming      - Online Distribution: Partnering with the
  and Distributing Online Media. Analyzes       AOL Behemoth
  the integration of content, navigation,       - Online Events: Exploiting Marquee Value
  communications, community and utility         for Audience Acquisition
  features for maximum audience acquisition     - Navigation: Creating an Intuitive
  and retention. Analysts delve into            Interface
  programming and distribution strategies,
  with a special focus on the transition of
  traditional assets, e.g., text, audio,
  video and commodity data, into the
  interactive space.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ONLINE ADVERTISING STRATEGIES: Buying and     - Emerging Ad Platforms: Anticipating the
  Selling Interactive Media. Provides             Next Generation of Advertising
  analysis of both the business and practice    - Mining the Clickstream for Competitive
  of interactive advertising. Analysts            Advantage
  deliver insight and advice that help          - Agency Relationships: Developing Cost-
  advertisers maximize return on investment       Effective Compensation
  from their online efforts, publishers
  generate ad revenues and technology
  vendors and service providers best
  position themselves to prospective
  clients.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  SITE OPERATION STRATEGIES: Managing the       - Customer Support: Metrics for Cost and
  New Media Enterprise. Analyzes the              Performance
  planning, development and management          - Testing Tools and Methodologies for a
  problems that plague all organizations          Failure-Proof Site
  running online businesses. The practice       - Site Hosting: Evaluating Outsourcing
  provides cost metrics, vendor evaluation        Options
  models, management strategies, best
  practices and case studies. This research
  is designed to help business managers
  understand how technology and operations
  affect the bottom line and solve the
  problems that they face today.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

                                       36
<PAGE>   39

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  PRACTICE                                     RECENT REPORTS
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                             <C>
  WEB TECHNOLOGY STRATEGIES: Positioning for    - The Net-Enabled PC: Evolving Features,
  Advanced Digital Platforms. Examines            Emerging Business Opportunities
  consumer adoption of new technologies and     - Browser Evolution: Developing Sites for
  the advent of new development                 the Post-Browser-War World
  architectures that directly impact the        - Web Media: Serving Sizzle in the Bandwidth
  consumer experience. Offering practical         Drizzle
  advice about where executives should focus
  their investment dollars, this practice
  features examples of how sites are
  developing applications to leverage the
  emergence of advanced technologies and
  predicts which vendors stand to win the
  standards and licensing wars.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  BANDWIDTH & ACCESS STRATEGIES: Leveraging     - Bandwidth: Consumer Access Implications of
  Internet Communications Evolution.              the Fight for Fiber
  Analyzes the dynamics of the consumer         - ISP Partnerships: Driving Value Through
  market for enhanced, broadband                  Web-Based Services
  communications, specifically as it is         - Unified Messaging: Reducing Complexity to
  impacted by the emergence of the Internet.      Generate Mass-Market Demand
  This practice also provides essential
  advice for a range of online initiatives
  affected by the evolving communications
  landscape, as well as for traditional
  telecommunications providers, vendors and
  application developers.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  EUROPEAN INTERNET STRATEGIES: Competing       - Personalization: Confronting European
  for Emerging Online Markets. Advises new      Privacy Challenges
  media players on responding to consumer       - Digital Television: Preparing for the
  interest in the Internet in Europe. Based     Internet's Sister Medium
  in London, our analysts provide               - The Euro: Meeting the Challenges of a
  perspectives on in-country and European         Unified Currency
  developments, from the implications of
  set-top devices and emerging broadband
  solutions to the potential for advertising
  revenue and commerce transactions.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>


     We recently launched a new practice, Commerce Infrastructure Strategies,
and continually evaluate the market demand for additional practices. We seek out
and receive input from our research analysts, the sales representatives that are
in constant contact with existing and potential clients and our marketing staff
as to the demand for specific research and our ability to provide coverage. We
also examine a variety of empirical data, including breadth of applicability,
uniqueness of the offering, competitive value and ease of communication.



     The SPS program is designed to provide business executives with the most
up-to-date research and analysis. We provide written reports on a regular basis
as well as ongoing access to our research analysts in order to answer specific
questions or clarify information relating to the practice topic. Specifically,
clients in any of the eight practices receive the following:


     - Monthly Analyst Reports.  Each monthly report examines a different
       industry, trend, product segment or business model relating to the
       specific practice.

     - Analyst Access.  Clients have access to Jupiter's research analysts for
       discussion, debate and additional advice. This service is available by
       phone or e-mail.

                                       37
<PAGE>   40

     - Weekly Analyst Notes.  Each week, clients receive a one-page briefing
       that analyzes topical issues related to the practice.

     - Digital Access.  Clients have password-only access to current research
       and a fully-searchable archive, which includes research, company profiles
       and slides from analyst presentations. Digital access to our Web site
       also includes a weekly "JupMail" e-mail that updates clients on recent
       research and upcoming events.

     - Monthly Teleconferences.  Each month, the research analysts from each of
       the practices conduct a "JupTel" telephone conference call that outlines
       the key findings from a recent monthly analyst report.

     - Conference Passes.  Clients are entitled to a specified number of passes
       to our conferences.

  MARKET MODULES


     In mid-1998, we began selling market modules which are designed to help
executives understand how the Internet is transforming the competitive landscape
and business practices in specific industries or geographic areas. As with our
practices, we provide subscribers with both written reports and access to our
research analysts for inquiries and insights. Specifically, subscribers to any
of the sixteen market modules receive two semi-annual research reports, a
two-page monthly analyst note, access to our research analysts and digital
access to our Web site. The semi-annual research reports provide both an
overview of the key trends and business developments as well as comprehensive
reference materials, market forecasts, identification of key competitors and
information relating to strategic partnerships and acquisitions. The monthly
note highlights recent key trends or developments in the industry or country.



     Our market modules provide us with an excellent opportunity to market our
research to new clients and industries, as well as the ability to market new
products to our existing clients. The following is a list of the sixteen market
modules in our SPS program, eight of which relate to specific industries and
eight of which relate to specific geographic areas:



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
             INDUSTRIES                          GEOGRAPHIC AREAS
             ----------                          ----------------
<S>                                    <C>
           Consumer Goods                             France
         Financial Services                           Germany
               Health                             United Kingdom
                Music                                 Canada
              Shopping                               Australia
             Television                            Latin America
               Travel                                  Japan
             Classifieds                              Nordic
</TABLE>



     As other industries and countries are affected by the growth of the
Internet, we anticipate expanding the number of our market modules which focus
on industries and geographic areas. As with our practices, we examine on an
ongoing basis the demand for new market modules.


  MINDSHARE SENIOR EXECUTIVE PROGRAM

     In February 1999, we launched our MindShare Senior Executive Program, which
is specifically targeted at chief executive officers and other senior executives
across all industries. This program combines forward-looking, broad strategic
advice with focused strategy sessions with our analysts. MindShare is designed
to enable these executives to better position and focus their companies,
prioritize business development opportunities, assess long-term competitive
threats and successfully integrate new technologies with Internet commerce.

     The cornerstone of our MindShare program is two half-day strategy sessions
with two research analysts per session at a location selected by the client. Our
MindShare clients also receive written reports that contain extensive
forward-looking research related to trends, changes and developments in the
Internet

                                       38
<PAGE>   41

commerce marketplace. These quarterly reports are supplemented by monthly
briefings that focus on topical issues and major industry developments.
Furthermore, MindShare clients are invited to participate in our annual
executive forum, which is an invitation-only event targeted at a select group of
senior executive officers and technology leaders.

     In addition to providing significant value for our clients, MindShare helps
us to establish strong relationships with top executives at client companies. We
expect MindShare to enable us to bolster retention rates for SPS and to
strengthen our relationships with clients. We expect that the number of
MindShare clients will increase as we continue to expand the marketing of this
program and as the value of the products and services becomes more widely known.

JUPITER CONFERENCES

     We produce a wide range of conferences which provide comprehensive coverage
of issues relating to Internet commerce. These conferences offer senior
executives the opportunity to hear first-hand the insights of our analysts and
the leading decision makers in the Internet and technology industries. Our
events, which typically run for two to three days, provide an excellent
opportunity to showcase our research to current and potential clients, increase
the public profile of our research analysts, generate favorable press and
otherwise promote the Jupiter brand. Since over 75% of the attendees at our
conferences are not SPS clients, these events provide a unique opportunity to
promote our research products and services to potential customers. As a result,
our marketing staff and sales representatives attend each of our events and
conduct continuous promotional and direct sales efforts targeted at potential
clients. We believe that our events and the sales and marketing efforts at these
events have resulted in numerous SPS contracts.

     Our conferences, located in the United States and in Europe, are notable
for the senior level of attendees from all sectors of the online and media
industries. We produced eight conferences in 1997 and nine conferences in 1998.
We have scheduled ten conferences for calendar year 1999, six of which are large
events and four of which are small events. Paid attendance at our large events
typically ranges from 800-1,200 participants, while paid attendance at our small
events typically ranges from 400-600 participants. We also solicit sponsors and
exhibitors for each of our events. Exhibitors receive a booth at the conference
to promote their companies and are also listed in the conference program.
Sponsors receive prominent display of their corporate logos in the conference
program and the main meeting hall of the conference, and may host a reception
during the conference. We typically have approximately 50-75 sponsors and
exhibitors at our large events and 25 sponsors and exhibitors at our small
events.

     We have successfully increased attendance at our various conferences over
the past few years. For example, paid attendance at our seven conferences held
through August 1999 was 5,279, 95% above total paid attendance for all nine of
our conferences held in 1998. In addition, paid attendance at the six
conferences held so far in 1999 that were also held in 1998 has increased by
101%.

                                       39
<PAGE>   42

     The following is a list of the ten events scheduled for 1999, nine of which
are located in the United States and one of which will take place in London, and
the year the conference was first held:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             CONFERENCE                                  TOPIC
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------    YEAR FIRST HELD
<S>                                    <C>                                        <C>

  [Jupiter Consumer Online NYC Logo]   Internet Strategies for Mainstream Media          1994
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Digital Kids Logo]                  Marketing to the Post-Modern Kid                  1995
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Jupiter Consumer Online Europe
     Logo]                             The European Internet Economy                     1995
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Plug.In Logo]                       The Jupiter Music Forum                           1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Jupiter Advertising Online]         Online in the Media Mix                           1996
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [@ Travel Logo]                      Strategies for Destination-Based Commerce         1997
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Jupiter Shopping Logo]              Reinventing Retail                                1998
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Jupiter Financial Services Logo]    Portals for Consumer Finance                      1998
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Mindshare Logo]                     The Jupiter Executive Forum                       1999
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

  [Jupiter Entertainment Forum Logo]   Hollywood and the Internet                        1999
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>

     As Internet commerce continues to grow, we anticipate that we will expand
the number of events that we produce as well as attract higher attendance at our
conferences. We also expect to devote more resources to promoting events outside
the United States or events with more of an international focus. Specifically,
in addition to the ten conferences described above, we plan to produce four
additional events during calendar year 2000, including conferences on health
care, European shopping and Latin America.

PUBLISHING AND CUSTOM RESEARCH

     We also provide other research products and services to clients, including
book-length research reports and customized research.

     We annually publish approximately fifteen book-length research studies that
are available for purchase through direct mail or on our Web site. Sales of
these studies are an important way to expose new companies and executives to our
research.

     We also perform customized, client-focused research projects relating to
Internet commerce on a limited basis. These projects allow our clients to take
advantage of the knowledge and experience of our research analysts and to
develop structured, detailed responses to specific issues relevant to their
business. Custom studies often form the basis to explore a new practice or
market module and, like our book-length studies, are an effective way to expose
new companies and executives to our research products and services.

CLIENTS

     Our client base has rapidly expanded since we launched SPS. In addition,
our client base has diversified from primarily technology and media companies to
include large and small companies in the Internet, media, telecommunications,
technology, financial services, consumer products, retail, travel and

                                       40
<PAGE>   43

professional services industries. Many of our clients have limited experience
with Internet commerce or operating an online business. The users of our
research products and services at our client companies hold diverse positions,
demonstrating the importance of Internet commerce to a company's overall
strategy and development. In addition to chief executive officers and
presidents, our users include marketing, business development, operations,
strategic planning and information technology executives.


     As of June 30, 1999, we had 654 contracts for our Strategic Planning
Services. As of June 30, 1999, our clients included 78 of the Fortune 1000
companies, 22 of the AdWeek Top 100 Megabrands, 10 of the Fortune 50 commercial
banks and 29 of Media Metrix's top 50 Web properties. Approximately 88% of these
customers are headquartered in the United States and the remainder are located
primarily in Europe. We expect that our client base will continue to expand as
we introduce new practices and market modules and increase our sales and
marketing initiatives. We also believe there is significant opportunity to
increase our penetration of large corporate clients. In addition, we expect the
number of our international clients to increase significantly as the use of the
Internet grows in other parts of the world and as we introduce additional
products and services targeted to international markets.


     To date, none of our clients have accounted for more than 2% of the total
annual revenues generated from SPS.


     The following is a representative list of our larger clients in terms of
revenue:



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                               PROFESSIONAL
    CONSUMER BRANDS       FINANCIAL SERVICES        INTERNET                MEDIA                SERVICES
    ---------------       ------------------        --------                -----              ------------
<S>                      <C>                   <C>                  <C>                    <C>
Cross Pen                Hartford Financial    America Online       BBC                    Agency.com
Encyclopedia Brittanica  Services              Inktomi              Cablevision            DoubleClick
Hertz                    J.P. Morgan           MP3.com              International Olympic  iXL Enterprises
Toys "R" Us              Putnam Investments    Sportsline USA       Committee              Rare Medium
Vitamin Shoppe           Soundview Technology  Virtual Communities  Landmark               Strategic Interactive
                         Visa                                       Communications         Group
                                                                    Time Warner
</TABLE>



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
     RETAIL        TECHNOLOGY        TELECOM             TRAVEL
     ------        ----------        -------             ------
  <S>            <C>              <C>             <C>
  Amway          Compaq           AT&T            Continental
  Cybershop      Gateway          British           Airlines
  800.com        Hewlett Packard    Telecom       Delta Airlines
  boo.com        IBM              France          Pacific Access
  Value America  Intel              Telecom       Starwood Hotels
                                  MediaOne        Swiss Air
                                  Sprint
</TABLE>


RESEARCH METHODOLOGY


     Our research methodology enables us to deliver compelling, data-driven and
timely analysis across all eight practices and sixteen market modules. Our
research products and services are generated by a growing team of research
professionals, including research analysts, an independent data research group
and a dedicated staff to handle client inquiries. These research professionals
are supported by in-house primary research tools and proprietary databases. In
addition, we have implemented a rigorous editorial and review process to ensure
that every report is accurate, well-written and useful to our clients.


     As of June 30, 1999, we employed a total of 74 research professionals,
including 38 analysts. The knowledge and experience of our research
professionals, particularly our analysts, are the crucial elements in our
ability to provide high-quality, timely and original research. Our analysts have
extensive industry experience and varied backgrounds. We recruit them from a
number of different industries, including management consulting and research
firms, financial services, publishing, entertainment and advertising. We believe
that the diverse backgrounds and experiences of our analysts allow us to provide
original and prescriptive research and analysis which frequently challenges the
conventional wisdom and viewpoints promoted by others. We expect to
significantly expand the number of our research analysts as we grow the business
and increase the number of practices and market modules.

                                       41
<PAGE>   44

     The reports published by our analysts are supplemented with primary
research, data gathering, interviews and surveys of high-level industry
executives. To assist our analysts and their research activities, we have a
dedicated data research group that conducts discrete research and survey
projects, develops and maintains a series of econometric forecast models and
works with the analysts to provide a statistical foundation for their findings.

     Our analysts and our data research group have access to significant
proprietary data, including the following:

     - HOUSEHOLD SURVEYS.  Twice a year, we field a broad benchmarking survey of
       a large representative sample of United States households, including
       those that are not yet online. Data from these consumer surveys are
       incorporated into the body of our proprietary research products.

     - ONLINE USER SURVEYS.  Each month, we conduct focused, in-depth surveys of
       thousands of online consumers. As with the household surveys described
       above, the data from these surveys are incorporated into the body of our
       proprietary research products.

     - MARKET FORECASTS.  Our analysts forecast the future of various online
       markets to help guide clients' strategies and investments. Complementing
       our qualitative predictions, these forecasts measure the expected growth
       of many industry indicators and market sectors.

     - EXECUTIVE SURVEYS.  We conduct phone and written surveys with top
       industry executives to understand their strategies, attitudes and
       intentions. These data provide our research analysts with systematic and
       comprehensive insight into those leaders whose actions shape the online
       marketplace.

     We design the large-scale household and online user surveys described above
which are conducted through our arrangement with NFO Worldwide, one of the
largest worldwide research organizations. In exchange for these surveys, we pay
NFO Worldwide a fee and provide complementary sponsorships, exhibit booths and
speaking opportunities at many of our conferences. While NFO maintains the
panels, all of the questions and surveys that we prepare and provide NFO, as
well as all of the findings and results from these survey panels, remain our
proprietary data.

     All of our research products are subject to a stringent editorial and
review process to ensure the highest quality. We maintain consistency among the
formats of our research reports across the practices and market modules so as to
ensure clarity and readability by all of our clients. Each research topic is
first subject to a series of discussions and meetings to define the scope of the
topic, assess the relevance and importance of the research and highlight key
themes and questions. Prior to publication, each research report is subject to
ongoing review and comment from other analysts and research management.

SALES AND MARKETING


     We sell and market our research products and services primarily through our
direct sales force, which was comprised of 40 sales representatives as of June
30, 1999. This represents an increase from four sales representatives at the end
of 1997 and 21 sales representatives at the end of 1998. As with our research
analysts, our sales representatives have diverse backgrounds and experience in a
number of different industries. In addition, we have been very successful at
retaining our sales representatives. Of the 36 sales representatives hired
between January 1, 1998 and June 30, 1999, 32 are still employed with us.


     Our sales representatives currently consist of strategic account managers,
who are each responsible for 20 to 30 multinational companies, and geographic
account managers, who are each responsible for specific territories. Our
strategic account managers are focused on selling a broad array of products and
services across a global enterprise. Unlike many of our direct and indirect
competitors, we try, to the extent possible, to locate our sales representatives
in the geographic territories that they cover. Specifically, as of June 30,
1999, 34 of our 40 sales representatives were located in the territories that
they cover. We believe that this allows us to develop stronger relationships
with our current and potential clients and to better understand the changing
needs of our clients. We have implemented a training program for all of our new
sales representatives and believe that this program has been effective in
enabling our sales representatives to quickly and effectively solicit new
clients. Sales representatives receive a base salary and are eligible for
commissions based on new business and renewals.

                                       42
<PAGE>   45


     We expect to significantly increase the number of our sales representatives
as we grow the business and increase our international operations. In addition
to our sales representatives, we use independent sales distributors to sell our
products and services in Australia, Singapore and Israel. We are currently
exploring similar distribution arrangements in other countries and may enter
into additional agreements of this nature in the future.


     We have developed a number of strategies and programs to build awareness of
the Jupiter name and to position the company as the definitive research resource
for Internet commerce. We employ an active press relations team, which responds
to hundreds of press inquiries on a weekly basis, and an in-house
promotions/advertising staff, which is responsible for developing sales
literature and direct mail campaigns and managing our advertising efforts. Our
analysts are frequently quoted in articles on the Internet and e-commerce that
appear in major newspapers, magazines and industry periodicals. In addition, we
actively encourage our research analysts to speak at non-Jupiter industry and
corporate events in order to enhance our reputation and promote our diverse
products. For example, in the first six months of 1999, our research analysts
appeared at approximately 80 non-Jupiter events, conferences and forums around
the world, and we intend to increase this activity in the future. We estimate
that our analysts addressed approximately 36,000 people at these functions. We
also host numerous breakfast forums around the world which are targeted at
potential customers and designed to enhance our visibility and reputation.
During the first six months of 1999, we hosted a total of 38 forums which
collectively had over 2,300 guests. We also devote significant resources to
promoting our numerous research products and services to the thousands of
individuals attending our conferences. Lastly, we use our Web site as a tool to
market the Jupiter name and expose potential customers to our products.

COMPETITION

     We believe that the primary competitive factors determining success in our
markets include the quality and timeliness of our research and analysis, our
ability to offer products and services that meet the changing needs of our
customers, the prices we charge for our various research products and general
economic conditions. We believe that we compete favorably with respect to each
of these factors. In addition, we believe that we distinguish ourselves from our
competitors as a result of the depth and breadth of our Strategic Planning
Services, the extent to which we provide access to our research analysts, the
quality of our research analysts and sales representatives and the primary
research tools and proprietary databases that we have developed internally.

     Our principal current competitor is Forrester Research. Recently Gartner
Group announced its intention to compete directly in providing research products
related to Internet commerce. A number of other companies compete with us in
providing research and analysis related to a specific industry or geographic
area. In addition, our competitors include information technology research
firms, business consulting and accounting firms, electronic and print publishing
companies and equity analysts employed by financial services companies.


     We expect competition to increase because of the business opportunities
presented by the growth of Internet commerce around the world. Competition may
also intensify as a result of industry consolidation, because the markets in
which we operate face few substantial barriers to entry or because some of our
competitors may provide additional or complementary services, such as consulting
services. Our current and potential competitors include many companies that have
substantially greater financial, information gathering and marketing resources
than we have. For example, Gartner Group, Forrester Research and META Group,
Inc. each had higher revenues than we did during 1998, and each currently has
greater information gathering and marketing resources than we have. This may
allow them to devote greater resources than we can to the promotion of their
brand and to the development and sale of their products and services. We cannot
assure you that we will be able to compete successfully against current and
future competitors.


INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY AND PROPRIETARY RIGHTS

     To protect our rights to our intellectual property, we rely on a
combination of trademark and copyright law, trade secret protections and
confidentiality agreements and other contractual arrangements with our employees
and third parties. We have registered the Jupiter, Jupiter Communications and

                                       43
<PAGE>   46

Internet Business Report marks in the United States, and we have pending
trademark applications for certain other trademarks in the United States,
including SPS. We also have pending trademark applications for the Jupiter and
Jupiter Communications marks in various foreign jurisdictions. We provide our
proprietary research products to hundreds of different companies throughout the
world, including some companies that compete with us in some manner. As a
result, the protective steps we have taken may be inadequate to protect our
intellectual property and to deter misappropriation of the original research and
analysis that we develop. We also may be unable to detect the unauthorized use
of, or take appropriate steps to enforce, our intellectual property rights.
Moreover, effective trademark, copyright and trade secret protection may not be
available in every country in which we offer our research products and services
to the extent available in the United States.

     Our failure to adequately protect our intellectual property, either in the
United States or abroad, could harm the Jupiter brand or our trademarks, devalue
our proprietary research and analysis and affect our ability to compete
effectively. Defending our intellectual property rights could result in the
expenditure of significant financial and managerial resources, which could harm
our financial results.

     Furthermore, although we believe that our proprietary rights do not
infringe on the intellectual property rights of others, other parties may assert
claims against us that we have misappropriated a trade secret or infringed a
patent, copyright, trademark or other proprietary right belonging to them. Any
infringement or related claims, even if not meritorious, could be costly and
time consuming to litigate, may distract management from other tasks of
operating the business and may result in the loss of significant rights and the
loss of our ability to operate our business.

EMPLOYEES

     As of June 30, 1999, we had 194 full-time employees, including 40 sales
representatives and 74 research staff, of which 38 were analysts. Our
compensation policy promotes employee ownership, and we believe that this policy
contributes to the high retention rates of our research analysts and sales
representatives. Specifically, as of June 30, 1999, approximately 93% of our
employees, including all of our research analysts and sales representatives,
owned options to purchase our securities.

     All of our research analysts and sales representatives, as well as all of
our executive officers, have entered into agreements that prohibit them from
being employed by a competitive company for a period of one year following their
termination of employment with us. None of our employees are represented under
collective bargaining agreements. We believe that our relations with our
employees are good.

FACILITIES


     Our headquarters are located in a leased facility in New York, New York,
consisting of approximately 27,700 square feet of office space. We also lease
office space in London, England, Stockholm, Sweden and San Francisco. We are in
negotiations to lease additional office space in New York, New York and in San
Francisco, California.


LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

     We are not a party to any material legal proceedings.

                                       44
<PAGE>   47

                                   MANAGEMENT

OUR EXECUTIVE OFFICERS, DIRECTORS AND KEY EMPLOYEES

     The executive officers, directors and key employees of Jupiter, and their
ages and positions, are:


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
NAME                                        AGE                     POSITION
<S>                                         <C>    <C>
EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS:
Gene DeRose...............................  36     Chairman of the Board of Directors and
                                                   Chief Executive Officer
Kurt Abrahamson...........................  38     President, Chief Operating Officer and
                                                   Director
Jean Robinson.............................  43     Chief Financial Officer
Peter Storck..............................  39     Senior Vice President, Research
Ken Male..................................  34     Vice President, Global Sales
Phil Whitney..............................  36     Vice President, Marketing
Joy Cerequas..............................  34     Vice President, Conferences
Robert Kavner.............................  56     Director
KEY EMPLOYEES:
Ross Rubin................................  31     Vice President and Senior Analyst
Adam Schoenfeld...........................  35     Vice President and Senior Analyst
Nicole Vanderbilt.........................  26     Vice President and Senior Analyst
Tim DeBaun................................  43     Chief Information Officer
Phil Dwyer................................  44     Managing Director, Europe
Jack Foreman..............................  34     Vice President, Strategic Development
</TABLE>


     GENE DEROSE has served as Chief Executive Officer of Jupiter since November
1996 and served as President of Jupiter from its inception to November 1996. He
has served as Chairman of the Board of Directors of Jupiter Communications, Inc.
since its formation in July 1999. Throughout 1994, prior to the formation of
Jupiter, Mr. DeRose was the President of the sole proprietorship which pre-dated
the formation of Jupiter. Mr. DeRose is a board member of MOUSE, a nonprofit
organization that provides volunteer technical manpower to New York City's
public schools, and also serves on the Advisory Board of the Markle Foundation's
E-mail For All campaign, an initiative that encourages the use of new
communications technologies for socially beneficial purposes. Mr. DeRose
received his B.A. from the University of Virginia. Mr. DeRose is the son-in-law
of Robert Kavner.

     KURT ABRAHAMSON has served as President and Chief Operating Officer of
Jupiter since its inception. He has served as a Director of Jupiter
Communications, Inc. since its formation in July 1999. Between October 1989 and
his joining Jupiter in 1994, Mr. Abrahamson served as Principal Analyst for the
Harvey M. Rose Corporation, a management consulting firm. Mr. Abrahamson
received a B.A. from Cornell University and an M.A. from the John F. Kennedy
School of Government at Harvard University.

     JEAN ROBINSON has served as Chief Financial Officer of Jupiter since March
1999. From January 1983 to January 1999, Ms. Robinson held various corporate
finance positions at J.P. Morgan & Co. Incorporated, including Vice President,
Equity Capital Markets from June 1993 to January 1999. Ms. Robinson received her
B.A. from Smith College and an M.B.A. from Columbia University.

     PETER STORCK has served as Senior Vice President, Research of Jupiter since
November 1998. From June 1998 to November 1998, Mr. Storck served as Vice
President, Research of Jupiter. From July 1996 to June 1998, he served as
Jupiter's Director, Online Advertising Strategies. From July 1995 to July 1996,
Mr. Storck served as a consultant to Jupiter. From January 1989 to July 1995,
Mr. Storck was simultaneously a novelist, a writing instructor at Columbia
University and a compensation specialist at Guy

                                       45
<PAGE>   48

Carpenter & Co., Inc., a reinsurance intermediary. Prior to that, he served as a
political advisor to various campaigns and officials. Mr. Storck received his
B.S. from Cornell University and an M.F.A. from Columbia University.

     KEN MALE has served as Vice President, Global Sales of Jupiter since
January 1998. From December 1995 to January 1998, he served as an Account
Manager for Giga Information Group, Inc., an information technology research
firm, and developed that company's equities research product. From June 1995 to
December 1995, Mr. Male was involved in the formation and launch of Giga
Information Group, Inc. Prior to June 1995, Mr. Male was a private consultant
and held various account manager positions at Gartner Group, Inc., Digital
Equipment Corporation and EMC Corporation. Mr. Male received his B.S. from
Boston College.

     PHIL WHITNEY has served as Vice President, Marketing of Jupiter since
December 1998. From April 1997 to December 1998 he served as Vice President,
Consumer Marketing at Money Magazine, a division of Time, Inc. From May 1992 to
April 1997, Mr. Whitney held various marketing positions at Money Magazine.
Prior to 1992, he held a number of circulation and consulting positions at
Audubon Magazine and Robert Cohen Associates, a publishing management and
consulting firm. Mr. Whitney received his B.A. from Tufts University.

     JOY CEREQUAS has served as Vice President, Conferences of Jupiter since
August 1998. From May 1994 to August 1998, she served as Group Show Director for
SIGS Publications, Inc., a producer of magazines, books and conferences. Prior
to working at SIGS Publications, Inc., Ms. Cerequas managed conferences and
events for the International Trademark Association and Citicorp Investment Bank.
Ms. Cerequas received B.S. degrees from both the S.I. Newhouse School of Public
Communications and the School of Management of Syracuse University.

     ROBERT KAVNER has served as a director of Jupiter Communications, Inc.
since its formation in July 1999. Since December 1998, Mr. Kavner has served as
a General Partner of idealab!, an incubator for starting and growing Internet
businesses. From September 1996 to December 1998, he was President and Chief
Executive Officer of On Command Corporation, a supplier of entertainment and
information services to the lodging industry. From June 1994 to September 1996,
he was an independent venture capitalist. From May 1984 to June 1994, he held a
number of senior level positions at AT&T Corporation, including CEO of the
Multimedia Products and Services Group and President of the Data Systems
Division. Prior to his work at AT&T, Mr. Kavner was a Partner at Coopers &
Lybrand, L.L.P. and was Co-Chairman of the firm's information industry practice.
Mr. Kavner serves on the Board of Directors of Fleet Financial Group, Inc.,
Earthlink Network, Inc., Ticketmaster Online Citysearch, Inc. and GoTo.Com, Inc.
He received his B.S. from Adelphi University and attended the Advanced
Management Program at Dartmouth University. Mr. Kavner is the father-in-law of
Mr. DeRose.

     ROSS RUBIN has served as Vice President and Senior Analyst of Jupiter since
April 1999. From November 1998 to April 1999, Mr. Rubin served as Senior
Research Officer of Jupiter. From January 1998 to November 1998, he served as
Jupiter's Group Director, Telecom and Technology, and from August 1996 to
January 1998, he served as Jupiter's Group Director, Consumer Internet
Technologies. From May 1996 to August 1996, Mr. Rubin was a Senior Analyst for
Jupiter. From March 1994 to May 1996, Mr. Rubin served as a Technology Analyst
for Salomon Brothers. From September 1991 to March 1994, he served as an Analyst
for McKinsey & Company. Mr. Rubin received his B.S. from Cornell University.

     ADAM SCHOENFELD has served as Vice President and Senior Analyst of Jupiter
since February 1995. From Jupiter's inception to February 1995, Mr. Schoenfeld
served as a news director for Jupiter. From March 1992 to June 1994, he worked
as a journalist for the Associated Press. Mr. Schoenfeld attended Cornell
University.

     NICOLE VANDERBILT has served as Vice President and Senior Analyst of
Jupiter since January 1999. From October 1996 to January 1999, she served as an
analyst for Jupiter and later the Practice Director of Jupiter's Digital
Commerce Strategies practice. From July 1995 to October 1996, she was an
information

                                       46
<PAGE>   49


technology consultant at Deloitte & Touche, L.L.P. Ms. Vanderbilt received her
B.S. from Princeton University in May 1995.


     TIM DEBAUN has served as Chief Information Officer of Jupiter since January
1999. From October 1993 to January 1999, Mr. DeBaun served as Vice President,
Head of Global Telecommunications for D. E. Shaw & Co., L.P., a securities and
investment firm. Mr. DeBaun received his B.A. from Marist College and did
graduate work at both the School of Computer Science of Rutgers University and
the School of Engineering of Columbia University.

     PHIL DWYER has served as Jupiter's Managing Director, European Internet
Strategies since February 1998. From January 1994 to February 1998, he was a
Publisher at Centaur Publications where he helped launch several publications,
including New Media Age. Mr. Dwyer received his B.A. from London University and
an M.A. from Brunel University.

     JACK FOREMAN has served as Vice President, Strategic Development of Jupiter
since February 1998. From June 1992 to February 1998, Mr. Foreman held a number
of positions at Gartner Group, Inc., including Financial Director, Vice
President of Business Operations, Interactive Systems and Vice President of
Business Products. Previously, he was a Senior Accountant at Price Waterhouse.
Mr. Foreman received his B.S. from The Wharton School at the University of
Pennsylvania and an M.B.A. from the University of Michigan.

COMPOSITION OF THE BOARD


     Upon the completion of this offering, we intend to file an amended and
restated certificate of incorporation pursuant to which our board of directors
will be divided into three classes, each of whose members will serve for a
staggered three-year term. Upon the expiration of the term of a class of
directors, directors in that class will be elected for three-year terms at the
annual meeting of stockholders in the year in which their term expires. Our
board of directors has resolved that Mr. Abrahamson will be a Class I Director
whose term expires at the 2000 annual meeting of stockholders, Mr. Kavner will
be a Class II Director whose term expires at the 2001 annual meeting of
stockholders and Mr. DeRose will be a Class III Director whose term expires at
the 2002 annual meeting of stockholders. With respect to each class, a
director's term will be subject to the election and disqualification of their
successors, or their earlier death, resignation or removal.


BOARD COMMITTEES


     The Audit Committee of the board of directors will be established either
prior to or shortly after the closing of this offering and will review, act on
and report to the board of directors with respect to various auditing and
accounting matters, including the recommendation of Jupiter's auditors, the
scope of the annual audits, fees to be paid to the auditors, the performance of
Jupiter's independent auditors and the accounting practices of Jupiter.



     The Compensation Committee of the board of directors will be established
either prior to or shortly after the closing of this offering and will
recommend, review and oversee the salaries, benefits and stock option plans for
Jupiter's employees, consultants, directors and other individuals compensated by
Jupiter. The Compensation Committee will also administer Jupiter's compensation
plans.


DIRECTOR COMPENSATION


     Other than reimbursing directors for customary and reasonable expenses of
attending board of directors or committee meetings, Jupiter does not currently
compensate its directors. Under our 1999 Stock Incentive Plan, each individual
who first joins the Jupiter board after September 17, 1999 as a non-employee
board member will automatically receive a grant of an option to purchase 50,000
shares of common stock at the time of his or her commencement of board service
or the date of the underwriting agreement for this offering, whichever is later.
In addition, on the date of each annual stockholders' meeting beginning in 2000,
each non-employee member of the board of directors who is to continue to


                                       47
<PAGE>   50


serve as a non-employee board member will automatically be granted an option to
purchase 5,000 shares of common stock. Please see "--1999 Stock Incentive Plan."


EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENTS

     We have entered into an employment agreement with Gene DeRose, dated
October 22, 1997. The initial term of this agreement expires on December 31,
1999, although Mr. DeRose has the option to renew the agreement for two
successive one-year terms. The agreement provides for Mr. DeRose to receive an
initial base salary of $165,000 and a bonus of $30,000 for the year ended
December 31, 1997. For each year thereafter, Mr. DeRose's salary is to be
increased within a specific range based on negotiations between Jupiter and Mr.
DeRose. For each calendar year after 1997, Mr. DeRose's annual bonus is based on
Jupiter's attainment of specified revenue targets. If Mr. DeRose's employment
agreement is terminated by us for any reason other than for cause or if he
voluntarily resigns under various circumstances, he is entitled to receive 50%
of the salary and bonus payments that would have been paid to him under his
employment agreement had he continued working for us for a period of eighteen
months following the date of termination.

     We have entered into an employment agreement with Kurt Abrahamson, dated
October 22, 1997. The initial term of this agreement expires on December 31,
1999, although Mr. Abrahamson has the option to renew the agreement for two
successive one-year terms. The agreement provides for Mr. Abrahamson to receive
an initial base salary of $155,000 and a bonus of $30,000 for the year ended
December 31, 1997. For each year thereafter, Mr. Abrahamson's salary is to be
increased within a specific range based on negotiations between Jupiter and Mr.
Abrahamson. For each calendar year after 1997, Mr. Abrahamson's annual bonus is
based on Jupiter's attainment of specific revenue targets. If Mr. Abrahamson's
employment agreement is terminated by us for any reason other than for cause or
if he voluntarily resigns under various circumstances, he is entitled to 50% of
the salary and bonus payments that would have been paid to him under his
employment agreement had he continued working for us for a period of eighteen
months following the date of termination.

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

     The following table sets forth the compensation earned for all services
rendered to us in all capacities during 1998 by our Chief Executive Officer and
the other three most highly compensated executive officers, other than our Chief
Executive Officer, who earned more than $100,000 in 1998 and who were serving as
executive officers at the end of 1998.

                           SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                ANNUAL              LONG-TERM
                                                           COMPENSATION(1)     COMPENSATION AWARDS
                                                          ------------------    SHARES UNDERLYING
NAME AND PRINCIPAL POSITION                                SALARY     BONUS        OPTIONS (#)
<S>                                                       <C>        <C>       <C>
Gene DeRose.............................................  $165,000   $50,000              --
  Chief Executive Officer
Kurt Abrahamson.........................................  $155,000   $50,000              --
  President and Chief Operating Officer
Peter Storck............................................  $116,750   $37,000          13,500
  Senior Vice President, Research
Ken Male................................................  $105,000   $96,000         100,000
  Vice President, Global Sales
</TABLE>

- ------------------------------
(1) The column for "Other Annual Compensation" has been omitted because there is
    no compensation required to be reported in that column. The aggregate amount
    of perquisites and other personal benefits provided to each executive
    officer listed above is less than the lesser of $50,000 and 10% of his total
    annual salary and bonus.

                                       48
<PAGE>   51

OPTION GRANTS IN LAST YEAR

     The following table sets forth information concerning individual grants of
options made during 1998 to each of our executive officers named in the Summary
Compensation Table. In the year ended December 31, 1998, Jupiter Communications,
LLC granted options to purchase 563,000 units, which will convert into options
to purchase 563,000 shares of common stock following the merger with Jupiter
Communications, Inc. We have never granted any stock appreciation rights.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                 INDIVIDUAL GRANTS(1)                 POTENTIAL REALIZABLE VALUE
                                   ------------------------------------------------     AT ASSUMED ANNUAL RATES
                                                % OF TOTAL                            OF STOCK PRICE APPRECIATION
                                   NUMBER OF     OPTIONS                                  FOR OPTION TERM(2)
                                     SHARES     GRANTED TO                            ---------------------------
                                   UNDERLYING   EMPLOYEES    EXERCISE
                                    OPTIONS     IN FISCAL    PRICE PER   EXPIRATION
NAME                                GRANTED        YEAR        SHARE        DATE          5%              10%
<S>                                <C>          <C>          <C>         <C>          <C>             <C>
Gene DeRose......................        --          --           --        --              --               --
Kurt Abrahamson..................        --          --           --        --              --               --
Peter Storck.....................    13,500         2.4%       $1.75     06/01/05      $ 9,618         $ 22,413
Ken Male.........................   100,000        17.8         1.75     04/14/05       71,243          166,025
</TABLE>

- ------------------------------

(1) Each option represents the right to purchase one share of common stock. The
    options shown in these columns, which were originally granted pursuant to
    Jupiter Communications, LLC's 1997 Option Plan, vest at a rate of 25% after
    one year from the date of grant and 6.25% each quarter thereafter.

(2) Amounts represent hypothetical gains that could be achieved for the
    respective options if exercised at the end of the option term. The 5% and
    10% assumed annual rates of compounded stock price appreciation are mandated
    by rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission and do not represent our
    estimate or projection of our future common stock prices. These amounts
    represent certain assumed rates of appreciation in the value of our common
    stock from the fair market value on the date of grant. Actual gains, if any,
    on stock option exercise depend on the future performance of the common
    stock. The amounts reflected in the table may not necessarily be achieved.

AGGREGATED OPTION EXERCISES IN THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1998 AND YEAR-END
OPTION VALUES

     The following table sets forth information concerning the number and value
of unexercised options held by each of our executive officers named in the
Summary Compensation Table at December 31, 1998. None of these executive
officers exercised options during the year ended December 31, 1998. This table
assumes the conversion of Jupiter Communications, LLC to a corporate form of
organization as of December 31, 1998.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                        NUMBER OF SHARES
                                                     UNDERLYING UNEXERCISED         VALUE OF UNEXERCISED
                                                     OPTIONS AT DECEMBER 31,        IN-THE-MONEY OPTIONS
                                                              1998                 AT DECEMBER 31, 1998(1)
                                                   ---------------------------   ---------------------------
NAME                                               EXERCISABLE   UNEXERCISABLE   EXERCISABLE   UNEXERCISABLE
<S>                                                <C>           <C>             <C>           <C>
Gene DeRose......................................         --             --             --             --
Kurt Abrahamson..................................    166,992             --       $375,976             --
Peter Storck.....................................     22,742         32,258         56,855       $ 63,770
Ken Male.........................................         --        100,000             --        125,000
</TABLE>

- ------------------------------

(1) There was no public trading market for our common stock as of December 31,
    1998. Accordingly, the values of the unexercised in-the-money options have
    been calculated on the basis of the fair market value at December 31, 1998
    of $3.00 per share, less the applicable exercise price, multiplied by the
    number of shares acquired on exercise.

                                       49
<PAGE>   52

1997 OPTION PLAN


     Jupiter Communications, LLC adopted the 1997 Option Plan in June 1997. A
total of 2,750,000 units have been reserved for issuance under this plan. As of
September 16, 1999, options to purchase a total of 2,532,731 units were
outstanding under the 1997 Option Plan. Upon the merger of Jupiter
Communications, LLC with and into Jupiter Communications, Inc., the plan and
each outstanding option will be assumed by Jupiter Communications, Inc. and no
further options will be granted under this plan.


     Each option has a maximum term of seven years. The exercise price of each
option must be paid in cash. In the event of an acquisition of Jupiter, each
option may, at our discretion, be accelerated or assumed by the successor
corporation.

1999 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN

     The 1999 Stock Incentive Plan will be adopted by the board of directors and
approved by our stockholders prior to the date of this offering. The 1999 Stock
Incentive Plan will be administered by our compensation committee.


     5,000,000 shares of common stock have been authorized for issuance under
the 1999 Stock Incentive Plan. However, in no event may one participant in the
1999 Stock Incentive Plan receive option grants or direct stock issuances for
more than 500,000 shares in the aggregate per calendar year.


     The 1999 Stock Incentive Plan will be divided into five separate programs:

     - the discretionary option grant program under which eligible individuals
       in the employ of Jupiter may be granted options to purchase shares of
       common stock at an exercise price determined by the plan administrator;

     - the stock issuance program under which eligible individuals may be issued
       shares of common stock directly, through the purchase of these shares at
       a price determined by the plan administrator or as a bonus tied to the
       performance of services;

     - the salary investment option grant program which may, at the plan
       administrator's discretion, be activated for one or more calendar years
       and, if so activated, will allow executive officers and other highly
       compensated employees the opportunity to use a portion of their base
       salary to acquire special below market stock option grants;

     - the automatic option grant program under which option grants will
       automatically be made at periodic intervals to eligible non-employee
       board members to purchase shares of common stock at an exercise price
       equal to 100% of the fair market value of those shares on the grant date;
       and

     - the director fee option grant program under which non-employee board
       members may be given the opportunity to use a portion of any retainer fee
       otherwise payable to them in cash for the year to acquire special below
       market stock option grants.

     The 1999 Stock Incentive Plan will include the following features:

     - The exercise price for any options granted under the plan may be paid in
       cash or in shares of our common stock valued at fair market value on the
       exercise date. The option may also be exercised through a same-day sale
       program without any cash outlay by the optionee.

     - The compensation committee will have the authority to cancel outstanding
       options under the discretionary option grant program in return for the
       grant of new options for the same or different number of option shares
       with an exercise price per share based upon the fair market value of
       common stock on the new grant date.

     - Stock appreciation rights may be issued under the discretionary option
       grant program. Such rights will provide the holders with the election to
       surrender their outstanding options for an appreciation distribution from
       Jupiter equal to the fair market value of the vested shares of common
       stock

                                       50
<PAGE>   53

       subject to the surrendered option less the exercise price payable for
       those shares. Jupiter may make the payment in cash or in shares of common
       stock.

     The 1999 Stock Incentive Plan will include change in control provisions
that may result in the accelerated vesting of outstanding option grants and
stock issuances:

     - In the event that Jupiter is acquired by merger or asset sale or a
       board-approved sale of more than 50% of Jupiter stock by its
       stockholders, each outstanding option under the discretionary option
       grant program that is not assumed or continued by the successor
       corporation will immediately become exercisable for all the option
       shares, and all unvested shares will immediately vest, except to the
       extent our repurchase rights with respect to those shares are to be
       assigned to the successor corporation.

     - The plan administrator may grant options which vest immediately upon an
       acquisition of Jupiter or upon a hostile change of control or upon the
       individual's termination of service following an acquisition that results
       in a change in control.


     The board will be able to amend or modify the 1999 Stock Incentive Plan at
any time, subject to any required stockholder approval. The 1999 Stock Incentive
Plan will terminate no later than September 16, 2009.


1999 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN

     The 1999 Employee Stock Purchase Plan will be adopted by the board of
directors and approved by the stockholders prior to the date of this offering.
The plan will become effective immediately upon the execution of the
underwriting agreement for this offering. The plan is designed to allow eligible
employees of Jupiter and its participating subsidiaries to purchase shares of
our common stock, at semi-annual intervals, through their periodic payroll
deductions. A total of 500,000 shares of common stock may be issued under the
plan.

     The plan will have a series of successive offering periods, each with a
maximum duration of 24 months. However, the initial offering period will begin
on the day the underwriting agreement is executed in connection with this
offering and will end on the last business day in October 2001. The next
offering period will begin on the first business day in November 2001, and
subsequent offering periods will be set by our compensation committee.


     A participant may contribute up to 15% of his or her cash earnings through
payroll deductions and the accumulated payroll deductions will be applied to the
purchase of shares on the participant's behalf on each semi-annual purchase date
(the last business day in April and October of each year). The purchase price
per share will be 85% of the lower of the fair market value of our common stock
on the participant's entry date into the offering period or the fair market
value on the semi-annual purchase date. The first purchase date will occur on
the last business day in April 2000. In no event, however, may any participant
purchase more than 850 shares, nor may all participants in the aggregate
purchase more than 125,000 shares on any one semi-annual purchase date. Should
the fair market value of the common stock on any semi-annual purchase date be
less than the fair market value on the first day of the offering period, then
the current offering period will automatically end and a new offering period
will begin, based on the lower fair market value.


     The board will be able to amend or modify the plan at any time. The plan
will terminate no later than the last business day in October 2009.

                                       51
<PAGE>   54

             TRANSACTIONS WITH DIRECTORS AND PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS

INVESTMENT BY GARTNER GROUP

     In October 1997, Gartner Group purchased 1,318,359 units from Jupiter
Communications, LLC for a total of $3.0 million. In connection with this
investment, Gartner Group was granted various rights, including, among others,
piggyback registration rights and the ability to appoint two of the five
representatives on the board of members. In addition, Gartner Group was granted
the right to approve a number of corporate actions taken by Jupiter
Communications, LLC. Gartner Group has also purchased 2,710,144 units from other
members of Jupiter Communications, LLC in a series of transactions.

     Upon the closing of this offering, all of the units owned by Gartner Group
will be exchanged for shares of common stock of Jupiter Communications, Inc. In
addition, except for piggyback registration rights and limited indemnification
rights, all of the specific rights granted to Gartner Group in connection with
its investment in the company will terminate upon the closing of this offering.
Furthermore, for a period of one year following the closing of this offering,
Gartner Group and its affiliates may not acquire, directly or indirectly, any
additional common stock, if the acquisition would cause Gartner Group and its
affiliates to own more than 32% of our common stock.

RELATIONSHIP WITH FLEET FINANCIAL GROUP, INC.

     Robert Kavner, one of our directors, is also a director of Fleet Financial
Group, Inc. Two affiliates of Fleet Financial Group, Inc. have SPS contracts
with us.

                                       52
<PAGE>   55

                             PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS


     The following table sets forth information with respect to the beneficial
ownership of the common stock as of September 16, 1999, and as adjusted to
reflect the sale of the shares of common stock offered hereby, by each person or
group of affiliated persons who is known by us to beneficially own 5% or more of
our common stock, each director, each executive officer named in the Summary
Compensation Table and all our directors and executive officers as a group. As
of September 16, 1999, there were 11,035,335 shares of common stock outstanding
and held of record by 26 stockholders, assuming the merger of Jupiter
Communications, LLC with and into Jupiter Communications, Inc. Unless otherwise
indicated, the address of each beneficial owner listed below is c/o Jupiter
Communications, Inc., 627 Broadway, New York, New York 10012.



     The following table gives effect to the shares of common stock issuable
within 60 days of September 16, 1999 upon the exercise of all options and other
rights beneficially owned by the indicated stockholders on that date. Beneficial
ownership is determined in accordance with the rules of the Securities and
Exchange Commission and includes voting and investment power with respect to
shares. Unless otherwise indicated, the persons named in the table have sole
voting and sole investment control with respect to all shares beneficially
owned.



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                PERCENTAGE OF SHARES
                                                                                 BENEFICIALLY OWNED
                                                            NUMBER OF SHARES    --------------------
                                                              BENEFICIALLY       BEFORE      AFTER
BENEFICIAL OWNER                                                 OWNED          OFFERING    OFFERING
<S>                                                         <C>                 <C>         <C>
Gartner Group, Inc.(1)....................................     4,028,503          36.5%       28.4%
Gene DeRose(2)............................................     2,393,478          21.7        16.9
Kurt Abrahamson(3)........................................     1,171,713          10.5         8.2
Joshua Harris(4)..........................................     1,070,595           9.7         7.6
Joshua A. Weinreich.......................................       971,221           8.8         6.9
Ernest Abrahamson(5)......................................       845,335           7.7         6.0
Robert Kavner.............................................       200,000           1.8         1.4
Peter Storck(6)...........................................        41,618             *           *
Ken Male(7)...............................................        43,625             *           *
All directors and executive officers as a group (8
  persons)................................................     3,856,684          34.1        26.7
</TABLE>


- ------------------------------

 *  Less than 1%.

(1) The address of Gartner Group, Inc. is 56 Top Gallant Road, P.O. Box 10212,
    Stamford, CT 06904.


(2) This number does not include 50,000 shares issuable upon the exercise of
    stock options that do not vest within 60 days of September 16, 1999.



(3) Includes 166,992 shares that are issuable upon the exercise of options. Mr.
    Abrahamson is expected to exercise these options prior to the closing of
    this offering. This number does not include 50,000 shares issuable upon the
    exercise of stock options that do not vest within 60 days of September 16,
    1999.



(4) Mr. Harris has granted the underwriters an option to purchase up to 235,000
    shares to cover over-allotments. The purchase price for the shares will
    equal the initial public price of this offering minus the underwriting
    discounts. If this option is exercised in full, Mr. Harris will beneficially
    own 835,595 shares of our common stock after this offering.



(5) Mr. Abrahamson has granted to the underwriters an option to purchase up to
    50,000 shares to cover over-allotments. The purchase price for the shares
    will equal the initial public price of this offering minus the underwriting
    discounts. If this option is exercised in full, Mr. Abrahamson will
    beneficially own 1,121,713 shares of our common stock after this offering.


                                       53
<PAGE>   56


(6) All of these shares are issuable upon the exercise of options. This number
    does not include 58,832 shares issuable upon the exercise of stock options
    that do not vest within 60 days of September 16, 1999.



(7) All of these shares are issuable upon the exercise of options. This number
    does not include 86,375 shares issuable upon the exercise of stock options
    that do not vest within 60 days of September 16, 1999.


                                       54
<PAGE>   57

                          DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
GENERAL

     The following description of our common stock and preferred stock and the
relevant provisions of our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and
amended and restated bylaws as will be in effect upon the closing of this
offering are summaries thereof and are qualified by reference to our amended and
restated certificate of incorporation and the amended and restated bylaws,
copies of which have been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission as
exhibits to our registration statement, of which this prospectus forms a part.

     Upon the closing of this offering, our authorized capital stock will
consist of 100,000,000 shares of common stock, par value $0.001 per share, and
5,000,000 shares of preferred stock, par value $0.001 per share.

COMMON STOCK

     Upon the closing of this offering, and giving effect to the issuance of
3,125,000 shares of common stock in this offering and the merger of Jupiter
Communications, LLC with and into Jupiter Communications, Inc., there will be
14,160,335 shares of common stock outstanding. Holders of common stock are
entitled to one vote for each share held on all matters submitted to a vote of
stockholders and do not have cumulative voting rights. Accordingly, holders of a
majority of the shares of common stock entitled to vote in any election of
directors may elect all of the directors standing for election. Holders of
common stock are entitled to receive ratably those dividends, if any, as may be
declared by the board of directors out of funds legally available therefor,
subject to any preferential dividend rights of any outstanding preferred stock.
Upon the liquidation, dissolution or winding up of Jupiter, the holders of
common stock are entitled to receive ratably the net assets of Jupiter available
after the payment of all debts and other liabilities and subject to the prior
rights of any outstanding preferred stock. Holders of the common stock have no
preemptive, subscription, redemption or conversion rights. The outstanding
shares of common stock are, and the shares offered by us in this offering will
be, when issued in consideration for payment thereof, fully paid and
nonassessable. The rights, preferences and privileges of holders of common stock
are subject to, and may be adversely affected by, the rights of the holders of
shares of any series of preferred stock which we may designate and issue in the
future. Upon the closing of this offering, there will be no shares of preferred
stock outstanding.

PREFERRED STOCK

     Upon the closing of this offering, there will be no shares of preferred
stock outstanding. Upon the closing of this offering, the board of directors
will be authorized, without further stockholder approval, to issue from time to
time up to an aggregate of 5,000,000 shares of preferred stock in one or more
series and to fix or alter the designations, preferences, rights and any
qualifications, limitations or restrictions of the shares of each series
thereof, including the dividend rights, dividend rates, conversion rights,
voting rights, terms of redemption, including sinking fund provisions,
redemption price or prices, liquidation preferences and the number of shares
constituting any series or designation of series. We have no present plans to
issue any shares of preferred stock. See "--Anti-Takeover Effects of Various
Provisions of Delaware Law and Jupiter's Certificate of Incorporation and
Bylaws."

OPTIONS


     Options to purchase a total of 7,750,000 shares of common stock may be
granted under the 1997 Option Plan and the 1999 Stock Incentive Plan. As of
September 16, 1999, there were outstanding options to purchase a total of
2,532,731 shares of common stock, of which options to purchase approximately
736,557 will be exercisable upon the closing of this offering. In addition,
there were outstanding options to purchase a total of 174,992 shares of common
stock upon the exercise of non-plan options, of which options to purchase
166,992 shares are currently exercisable. Since we intend to file a registration
statement on Form S-8 as soon as practicable following the closing of this
offering, any shares issued upon exercise of these options will be immediately
available for sale in the public market, subject to the terms of any lock-up
agreements entered into with the underwriters. See "Management--1997 Option
Plan," "Management--1999 Stock Incentive Plan" and "Shares Eligible for Future
Sale."


                                       55
<PAGE>   58

REGISTRATION RIGHTS

     Pursuant to the terms of a registration rights agreement, after the closing
of this offering the holders of 10,956,335 shares of common stock will be
entitled to piggyback registration rights with respect to the registration of
their shares under the Securities Act, subject to various limitations. These
registration rights are subject to specific conditions and limitations, among
them the right of the underwriters of an offering to limit the number of shares
of common stock held by security holders with registration rights to be included
in a registration. Registration of any shares of the shares of common stock held
by security holders with registration rights would result in shares becoming
freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act immediately upon
effectiveness of such registration.

ANTI-TAKEOVER EFFECTS OF PROVISIONS OF DELAWARE LAW AND JUPITER'S CERTIFICATE OF
INCORPORATION AND BYLAWS

     We are subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General
Corporation Law. Subject to some exceptions, Section 203 prohibits a publicly
held Delaware corporation from engaging in a "business combination" with an
"interested stockholder" for a period of three years after the date of the
transaction in which the person became an interested stockholder, unless the
interested stockholder attained that status with the approval of the board of
directors or unless the business combination is approved in a prescribed manner.
A "business combination" includes mergers, asset sales and other transactions
resulting in a financial benefit to the interested stockholder. Subject to
various exceptions, an "interested stockholder" is a person who, together with
affiliates and associates, owns, or within three years did own, 15% or more of
the corporation's voting stock. This statute could prohibit or delay the
accomplishment of mergers or other takeover or change in control attempts with
respect to Jupiter and, accordingly, may discourage attempts to acquire Jupiter.

     In addition, various provisions of our amended and restated certificate of
incorporation and our amended and restated bylaws, which provisions will be in
effect upon the closing of the offering and are summarized in the following
paragraphs, may be deemed to have an anti-takeover effect and may delay, defer
or prevent a tender offer or takeover attempt that a stockholder might consider
in its best interest, including those attempts that might result in a premium
over the market price for the shares held by stockholders.

     BOARD OF DIRECTORS VACANCIES.  Our amended and restated certificate of
incorporation authorizes the board of directors to fill vacant directorships or
increase the size of the board of directors. This may deter a stockholder from
removing incumbent directors and simultaneously gaining control of the board of
directors by filling the vacancies created by this removal with its own
nominees.

     STOCKHOLDER ACTION; SPECIAL MEETING OF STOCKHOLDERS.  Our amended and
restated certificate of incorporation provides that stockholders may not take
action by written consent, but only at duly called annual or special meetings of
stockholders. The amended and restated certificate of incorporation further
provides that special meetings of stockholders of Jupiter may be called only by
the chairman of the board of directors, the chief executive officer or a
majority of the board of directors.

     AUTHORIZED BUT UNISSUED SHARES.  The authorized but unissued shares of
common stock and preferred stock are available for future issuance without
stockholder approval, subject to various limitations imposed by the Nasdaq
National Market. These additional shares may be utilized for a variety of
corporate purposes, including future public offerings to raise additional
capital, corporate acquisitions and employee benefit plans. The existence of
authorized but unissued shares of common stock and preferred stock could make
more difficult or discourage an attempt to obtain control of us by means of a
proxy contest, tender offer, merger or otherwise.

     The Delaware General Corporation Law provides generally that the
affirmative vote of a majority of the shares entitled to vote on any matter is
required to amend a corporation's certificate of incorporation or bylaws, unless
a corporation's certificate of incorporation or bylaws, as the case may be,
requires a greater percentage.

TRANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR

     The transfer agent and registrar for our common stock is American Stock
Transfer & Trust Company, New York, New York.
                                       56
<PAGE>   59

                        SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE


     Sales of substantial amounts of our common stock in the public market could
adversely affect prevailing market prices of our common stock. Furthermore,
since few shares will be available for sale shortly after this offering because
of various contractual and legal restrictions on resale described below, sales
of substantial amounts of common stock in the public market after these
restrictions lapse could adversely affect the prevailing market price and our
ability to raise equity capital in the future.


     Upon the closing of this offering, we will have outstanding an aggregate of
14,160,335 shares of our common stock, assuming no exercise of the underwriters'
over-allotment option and no exercise of outstanding options. Of these shares,
all shares sold in this offering will be freely tradeable without restriction or
further registration under the Securities Act unless such shares are purchased
by "affiliates" as that term is defined in Rule 144 under the Securities Act.
This leaves 11,035,335 shares eligible for sale in the public market as follows:


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
NUMBER OF
SHARES                                                  DATE
<S>                                     <C>
 235,000                                     After the date of this
                                             prospectus (only if the
                                        over-allotment option is not
                                        exercised).
3,863,957                                    After 90 days from the date of
                                             this prospectus (subject, in
                                        some cases, to volume limitations).
6,044,164                                    After 180 days from the date of
                                             this prospectus (subject, in
                                        some cases, to volume limitations).
 892,214                                     At various times after 180 days
                                             from the date of this
                                        prospectus.
</TABLE>


LOCK-UP AGREEMENTS


     Except as set forth below, all of our officers and directors and
substantially all of our stockholders and option holders have signed lock-up
agreements under which they agreed not to transfer or dispose of, directly or
indirectly, any shares of our common stock or any securities convertible into or
exercisable or exchangeable for shares of our common stock for 180 days after
the date of this prospectus. Transfers can be made sooner with the prior written
consent of Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation, in the case of
some transfers to affiliates, or if made as a bona fide gift.



     Our largest stockholder, Gartner Group, has not signed a similar lock-up
agreement. The Company believes, however, that Gartner Group may be deemed an
"affiliate" as that term is defined in Rule 144 and therefore may not sell any
shares held by it until 90 days from the date of this prospectus and thereafter
may sell shares subject only to the Rule 144 volume limitations discussed below.
Gartner Group has advised us that it does not believe it will be an "affiliate"
following the closing of this offering. In the event Gartner Group is deemed not
to be an "affiliate" after this offering, it will be able to sell as many as
3,515,624 shares of our common stock in the public market without regard to
volume limitations beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus, which
could adversely affect the price of our stock. In addition, in the event that
the over-allotment option is not exercised by the underwriters, one of our non-
management stockholders may be able to sell up to 235,000 shares of our common
stock in the public market immediately.


RULE 144


     In general, under Rule 144 as currently in effect, beginning 90 days after
the date of this prospectus, a person who has beneficially owned shares of our
common stock for at least one year would be entitled to sell within any
three-month period a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of 1% of
the number of shares of common stock then outstanding, which will equal
approximately 141,603 shares immediately after the offering, or the average
weekly trading volume of the common stock on the Nasdaq

                                       57
<PAGE>   60

National Market during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice
on Form 144 with respect to such sale. Sales under Rule 144 are also subject to
specific manner-of-sale provisions, notice requirements and the availability of
current public information about us.

RULE 144(k)

     Under Rule 144(k), a person who is not one of our affiliates at any time
during the 90 days preceding a sale and who has beneficially owned the shares
proposed to be sold for at least two years, including the holding period of any
prior owner other than an affiliate, is entitled to sell such shares without
complying with the manner of sale, public information, volume limitation or
notice provisions of Rule 144. Therefore, unless otherwise restricted, "144(k)"
shares may be sold immediately upon completion of this offering.

RULE 701

     In general, under Rule 701 of the Securities Act as currently in effect,
each of our employees, consultants or advisors who purchases shares from us in
connection with a compensatory stock plan or other written agreement is eligible
to resell such shares 90 days after the effective date of this offering in
reliance on Rule 144, but without compliance with various restrictions,
including the holding period, contained in Rule 144.

REGISTRATION RIGHTS

     After this offering, the holders of at least 10,956,335 shares of our
common stock will be entitled to various rights with respect to the registration
of those shares under the Securities Act. See "Description of Capital
Stock--Registration Rights." After such registration, these shares of our common
stock become freely tradeable without restriction under the Securities Act.
These sales could have a material adverse effect on the trading price of our
common stock.


STOCK OPTIONS


     Immediately after this offering, we intend to file a registration statement
under the Securities Act covering 8,424,492 shares of common stock reserved for
issuance under our 1997 Option Plan, our 1999 Stock Incentive Plan, our Employee
Stock Purchase Plan and the shares reserved for issuance upon exercise of
outstanding non-plan options. We expect this registration statement to be filed
and to become effective as soon as practicable after the effective date of this
offering.


     As of September 16, 1999, options to purchase 2,707,223 shares of common
stock were issued and outstanding. All of these shares will be eligible for sale
in the public market from time to time, subject to vesting provisions, Rule 144
volume limitations applicable to our affiliates and, in the case of some
options, the expiration of lock-up agreements.


                                       58
<PAGE>   61

                                  UNDERWRITING

     Subject to the terms and conditions contained in an underwriting agreement,
dated                , 1999, the underwriters named below, who are represented
by Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation, Deutsche Bank Securities
Inc., Thomas Weisel Partners LLC and DLJdirect Inc., have severally agreed to
purchase from us the number of shares set forth opposite their names below.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                 NUMBER
                       UNDERWRITERS:                            OF SHARES
                       -------------                            ---------
<S>                                                             <C>
Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation.........
Deutsche Bank Securities Inc................................
Thomas Weisel Partners LLC..................................
DLJdirect Inc. .............................................
                                                                  -----
          Total.............................................
                                                                  =====
</TABLE>

     The underwriting agreement provides that the obligations of the several
underwriters to purchase and accept delivery of the shares included in this
offering are subject to approval of specific legal matters by their counsel and
to various other conditions. The underwriters are obligated to purchase and
accept delivery of all the shares, other than those covered by the
over-allotment option described below, if they purchase any of the shares.

     The underwriters propose to initially offer some of the shares directly to
the public at the public offering price set forth on the cover page of this
prospectus and some of the shares to various dealers at the public offering
price less a concession not in excess of $     per share. The underwriters may
allow, and such dealers may re-allow, a concession not in excess of $     per
share on sales to other dealers. After the initial offering of the shares to the
public, the representatives may change the public offering price and such
concessions. The underwriters do not intend to confirm sales to any accounts
over which they exercise discretionary authority. An electronic prospectus is
available on the Web site maintained by DLJdirect Inc.


     The following table shows the underwriting fees to be paid to the
underwriters by us and the selling stockholders in connection with this
offering. We expect that the underwriting discount will not exceed 7%. These
amounts are shown assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the
underwriters' over-allotment option described below.



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                      PAID BY JUPITER         PAID BY SELLING STOCKHOLDERS
                                  ------------------------    ----------------------------
                                      NO           FULL            NO             FULL
                                   EXERCISE      EXERCISE       EXERCISE        EXERCISE
<S>                               <C>           <C>           <C>             <C>
Per Share.......................  $             $              $               $
Total...........................
</TABLE>


     We will pay the offering expenses, estimated to be approximately $1.1
million.


     We and the selling stockholders have granted to the underwriters an option,
exercisable for 30 days after the date of this prospectus, to purchase up to
468,750 additional shares at the public offering price less the underwriting
fees. The underwriters may exercise such option solely to cover over-allotments,
if any, made in connection with this offering. To the extent that the
underwriters exercise such option, each underwriter will become obligated,
subject to various conditions, to purchase a number of additional shares
approximately proportionate to that underwriter's initial purchase commitment.


     We have agreed to indemnify the underwriters against various civil
liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act of 1933, or to
contribute to payments that the underwriters may be required to make in respect
of any of those liabilities.


     Except as set forth below, we, all of our executive officers and directors
and substantially all of our stockholders and option holders have agreed, for a
period of 180 days from the date of this prospectus, not to, without the prior
written consent of Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation: offer,
pledge,

                                       59
<PAGE>   62


sell, contract to sell, sell any option or contract to purchase, purchase any
option or contract to sell, grant any option, right or warrant to purchase or
otherwise transfer or dispose of, directly or indirectly, any shares of our
common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable
for our common stock; or enter into any swap or other arrangement that transfers
all or a portion of the economic consequences associated with the ownership of
any common stock, regardless of whether any of these transactions is to be
settled by the delivery of common stock, or such other securities, in cash or
otherwise. Gartner Group, our largest shareholder has not signed a similar
lock-up agreement. In addition, in the event that the over-allotment option is
not exercised by the underwriters, one of our non-management stockholders may be
able to sell shares in the public market immediately. See "Shares Eligible For
Future Sale." In addition, during this 180-day period, we have also agreed not
to file any registration statement with respect to, and each of our executive
officers, directors, stockholders and option holders has agreed not to make any
demand for, or exercise any right with respect to, the registration of any
shares of common stock or any securities convertible into or exercisable or
exchangeable for common stock without the prior written consent of Donaldson,
Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation.


     Outside the United States, neither we nor the underwriters have taken any
action that would permit a public offering of the shares of common stock
included in this offering in any jurisdiction that requires action for that
purpose. The shares included in this offering may not be offered or sold,
directly or indirectly, nor may this prospectus or any other offering material
or advertisement in connection with the offer and sale of any of these shares be
distributed or published in any jurisdiction, except under circumstances that
will result in compliance with the applicable rules and regulations of that
jurisdiction. We advise persons who receive this prospectus to inform themselves
about and to observe any restrictions relating to the offering of the common
stock and the distribution of this prospectus. This prospectus is not an offer
to sell or a solicitation of an offer to buy any shares of our common stock
included in this offering in any jurisdiction where that would not be permitted
or legal.

     In connection with this offering, some underwriters may engage in
transactions that stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the price of the
common stock. Specifically, the underwriters may overallot this offering,
creating a syndicate short position. The underwriters may bid for and purchase
shares of our common stock in the open market to cover syndicate short positions
or to stabilize the price of the common stock. The underwriting syndicate may
reclaim selling concessions if the syndicate repurchases previously distributed
common stock in syndicate covering transactions, in stabilizing transactions or
in some other way or if Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Securities Corporation
receives a report that indicates clients of such syndicate members have
"flipped" the common stock. These activities may stabilize or maintain the
market price of the common stock above independent market levels. The
underwriters are not required to engage in these activities and may end any of
these activities at any time.

     We sell our research products and services to numerous financial services
companies, including each of the underwriters of this offering.

     Thomas Weisel Partners LLC, one of the representatives of the underwriters,
was organized and registered as a broker-dealer in December 1998. Since December
1998, Thomas Weisel Partners has been named as a lead or co-manager on 43 filed
public offerings of equity securities, of which 25 have been completed, and has
acted as a syndicate member in an additional 19 public offerings of equity
securities. Thomas Weisel Partners does not have any material relationship with
us or any of our officers, directors or other controlling persons, except with
respect to its contractual relationship with us pursuant to the underwriting
agreement entered into in connection with this offering.


     DLJdirect Inc. will make all allocations of securities distributed in this
offering through the use of the Internet. Approximately two to three weeks prior
to the scheduled offering date, DLJdirect will post on its Web site
(www.dljdirect.com) a brief description of the offering which contains only the
information permitted under Rule 134. At this time, DLJdirect will also send an
e-mail to all DLJdirect account holders with $100,000 or more in assets in their
accounts advising them of the offering. These account holders will have access
to the preliminary prospectus by links on the DLJdirect Web site. DLJdirect will


                                       60
<PAGE>   63


allocate the shares it has underwritten based on its judgment of what is in the
best interest of the issuer, considering the following criteria with respect to
the account holders expressing an interest in the offering: asset level of the
account, investment objectives of the account holder, trading history of the
account, tenure of the account at DLJdirect and post-offering activity in
previous offerings.


     Prior to this offering, there has been no established trading market for
our common stock. We will negotiate with the underwriters regarding the initial
public offering price for the shares of common stock offered by this prospectus.
In determining the initial public offering price, the factors we and the
underwriters will consider include:

     - the history of and the prospects for the industry in which we compete;

     - our past and present operations;

     - our historical results of operations;

     - our prospects for future earnings;

     - the recent market prices of securities of generally comparable companies;
       and

     - the general condition of the securities markets at the time of the
       offering.


     At our request, the underwriters have reserved for sale at the initial
public offering price up to 7% of the shares of common stock to be sold in this
offering for sale to our employees, friends and persons having business
relationships with us. Our employees who purchase more than 100 shares of common
stock in the initial public offering will sign lock-up agreements in connection
with purchases over 100 shares in the initial public offering. To the extent
these persons purchase the reserved shares, the number of shares available for
sale to the general public will be reduced. The underwriters will offer any
reserved shares not so purchased on the same basis as the other shares offered
by this prospectus.


                                       61
<PAGE>   64

                                 LEGAL MATTERS

     The validity of the common stock offered hereby will be passed upon for us
by Brobeck, Phleger & Harrison LLP, New York, New York. Various legal matters in
connection with the offering will be passed upon for the underwriters by Hale
and Dorr LLP, Boston, Massachusetts.

                                    EXPERTS


     The balance sheets of Jupiter Communications, LLC as of December 31, 1998
and 1997 and the related statements of operations, members' equity (deficiency)
and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31,
1998 have been included in reliance on the reports of KPMG LLP, independent
accountants, given on the authority of that firm as experts in auditing and
accounting.


                   WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     We have filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission a registration
statement on Form S-1, including exhibits, schedules and amendment filed with
the registration statement, under the Securities Act with respect to the common
stock to be sold in this offering. This prospectus does not contain all of the
information set forth in this registration statement. For further information
about us and the shares of common stock to be sold in the offering, please refer
to this registration statement. For additional information, please refer to the
exhibits that have been filed with our registration statement on Form S-1.

     You may read and copy all or any portion of the registration statement or
any other information we file at the Securities and Exchange Commission's public
reference room at 450 Fifth Street, N.W., Washington, D.C., 20549. You can
request copies of these documents upon payment of a duplicating fee, by writing
to the Securities and Exchange Commission. Please call the Securities and
Exchange Commission at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information about the public
reference rooms. Our Securities and Exchange Commission filings, including the
registration statement, will also be available to you on the Securities and
Exchange Commission's Web site (http://www.sec.gov).

     We intend to furnish our stockholders with annual reports containing
audited financial statements and to make available quarterly reports containing
unaudited financial information.

                                       62
<PAGE>   65

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                         INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                              PAGE
<S>                                                           <C>
Independent Auditors' Report................................   F-2
Balance Sheets as of December 31, 1997 and 1998, and June
  30, 1999 (unaudited)......................................   F-3
Statement of Operations for the years ended December 31,
  1996, 1997 and 1998, and for the six months ended June 30,
  1998 (unaudited) and 1999 (unaudited).....................   F-4
Statements of Members' Equity (Deficiency) for the years
  ended December 31, 1996, 1997 and 1998, and for the six
  months ended June 30, 1999 (unaudited)....................   F-5
Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31,
  1996, 1997 and 1998, and for the six months ended June 30,
  1998 (unaudited) and 1999 (unaudited).....................   F-6
Notes to Financial Statements...............................   F-7
</TABLE>

                                       F-1
<PAGE>   66

                          INDEPENDENT AUDITORS' REPORT

The Board of Members and Members
Jupiter Communications, LLC:

     We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of Jupiter Communications,
LLC as of December 31, 1997 and 1998, and the related statements of operations
and members' equity (deficiency), and cash flows for each of the years in the
three-year period ended December 31, 1998. These financial statements are the
responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an
opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

     We conducted our audits in accordance with generally accepted auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes
assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

     In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly,
in all material respects, the financial position of Jupiter Communications, LLC
as of December 31, 1997 and 1998, and the results of its operations and its cash
flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 1998, in
conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.

                                          /s/ KPMG LLP

New York, New York
March 18, 1999

                                       F-2
<PAGE>   67

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                                 BALANCE SHEETS
             DECEMBER 31, 1997, 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999 (UNAUDITED)


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                PRO FORMA
                                                                              PRO FORMA        AS ADJUSTED
                                                                           (SEE NOTE 2(A))   (SEE NOTE 2(A))
                                        DECEMBER 31,          JUNE 30,        JUNE 30,          JUNE 30,
                                   -----------------------   -----------   ---------------   ---------------
                                      1997         1998         1999            1999              1999
                                   ----------   ----------   -----------   ---------------   ---------------
                                                             (UNAUDITED)     (UNAUDITED)       (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                <C>          <C>          <C>           <C>               <C>
ASSETS
Current assets:
  Cash and cash equivalents......  $1,614,050   $  216,144   $ 1,553,525     $ 1,553,525       $46,953,525
  Accounts receivable, less
    allowance for doubtful
    accounts of $51,483, $37,915
    and $28,934 in 1997, 1998,
    and 1999, respectively.......   1,136,230    4,579,856     8,485,017       8,485,017         8,485,017
  Prepaid expenses and other
    assets.......................     141,062      797,168     1,752,473       1,752,473         1,752,473
                                   ----------   ----------   -----------     -----------       -----------
    Total current assets.........   2,891,342    5,593,168    11,791,015      11,791,015        57,191,015

Property and equipment, net......     396,805    1,071,432     3,032,566       3,032,566         3,032,566
Intangible assets, net...........      84,791       54,791        39,791          39,791            39,791
Investment in Methodfive LLC ....      48,740       26,510            --              --                --
Security deposits................      41,531      121,120       187,961         187,961           187,961
                                   ----------   ----------   -----------     -----------       -----------
    Total assets.................  $3,463,209   $6,867,021   $15,051,333     $15,051,333       $60,451,333
                                   ==========   ==========   ===========     ===========       ===========

LIABILITIES AND MEMBERS' EQUITY (DEFICIENCY)
Current liabilities:
  Accounts payable...............  $1,203,578   $1,241,618   $   812,616     $   812,616       $   812,616
  Accrued expenses...............     329,411      208,843       729,122         729,122           729,122
  Accrued compensation...........     135,915      841,624     1,029,417       1,029,417         1,029,417
  Deferred revenue...............   1,775,003    6,677,233    14,191,842      14,191,842        14,191,842
                                   ----------   ----------   -----------     -----------       -----------
    Total current liabilities....   3,443,907    8,969,318    16,762,997      16,762,997        16,762,997

Deferred rent....................      10,695       26,477       172,605         172,605           172,605
Common stock, $0.001 par value:
  100,000,000 shares authorized
  on a pro forma basis,
  10,819,335 shares outstanding
  on a pro forma basis, and
  13,944,335 shares outstanding
  on a pro forma, as adjusted,
  basis..........................          --           --            --          10,819            13,944
Additional paid-in capital.......   3,506,265    3,506,265     3,881,265      (1,895,088)       43,501,787
Accumulated deficit..............  (3,497,658)  (5,635,039)   (5,765,534)             --                --
                                   ----------   ----------   -----------     -----------       -----------
Total stockholders'/members'
  equity (deficiency)............       8,607   (2,128,774)   (1,884,269)     (1,884,269)       43,515,731
Commitments and contingencies....          --           --            --              --                --
                                   ----------   ----------   -----------     -----------       -----------
    Total liabilities and
       stockholders'/members'
       equity (deficiency).......  $3,463,209   $6,867,021   $15,051,333     $15,051,333       $60,451,333
                                   ==========   ==========   ===========     ===========       ===========
</TABLE>


                See accompanying notes to financial statements.
                                       F-3
<PAGE>   68

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                            STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
                  YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996, 1997 AND 1998
             AND FOR THE SIX MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1998 (UNAUDITED)
                         AND JUNE 30, 1999 (UNAUDITED)

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                SIX MONTHS ENDED
                                          YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,                   JUNE 30,
                                   --------------------------------------   -------------------------
                                      1996         1997          1998          1998          1999
                                   ----------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
                                                                            (UNAUDITED)   (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                <C>          <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>
Revenues:
  Strategic Planning Services....  $  565,555   $ 1,850,154   $ 6,183,188   $ 1,994,980   $ 8,166,289
  Conferences....................   2,685,834     3,426,079     4,889,703     1,979,021     4,552,796
  Other..........................   3,000,593     3,245,919     3,729,440     1,939,045     1,680,723
                                   ----------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
     Total revenues..............   6,251,982     8,522,152    14,802,331     5,913,046    14,399,808
Cost of services and
  fulfillment....................   4,686,993     6,259,433     9,675,838     4,281,976     6,853,869
                                   ----------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
     Gross profit................   1,564,989     2,262,719     5,126,493     1,631,070     7,545,939
Other operating expenses:
  Sales and marketing expenses...     514,548     1,557,676     3,173,368     1,313,430     4,008,079
  General and administrative
     expenses....................   1,663,565     2,955,340     4,090,506     1,918,220     3,668,355
                                   ----------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
     Total other operating
       expenses..................   2,178,113     4,513,016     7,263,874     3,231,650     7,676,434
                                   ----------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
     Net loss....................  $ (613,124)  $(2,250,297)  $(2,137,381)  $(1,600,580)  $  (130,495)
                                   ==========   ===========   ===========   ===========   ===========
Pro forma basic and diluted net
  loss per common share..........                             $     (0.21)  $     (0.16)  $     (0.01)
                                                              ===========   ===========   ===========
Pro forma weighted average common
  shares outstanding.............                              10,318,359    10,318,359    10,454,736
                                                              ===========   ===========   ===========
</TABLE>

                See accompanying notes to financial statements.
                                       F-4
<PAGE>   69

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                   STATEMENTS OF MEMBERS' EQUITY (DEFICIENCY)
                  YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996, 1997 AND 1998
             AND FOR THE SIX MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1999 (UNAUDITED)


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                     COMMON STOCK
                                 ---------------------   ADDITIONAL                         TOTAL
                                   NUMBER        PAR       PAID-IN     ACCUMULATED        MEMBERS'
                                  OF SHARES     VALUE      CAPITAL       DEFICIT     EQUITY (DEFICIENCY)
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------   -------------------
<S>                              <C>           <C>       <C>           <C>           <C>
Balance as of December 31,
  1995.........................           --   $    --   $   228,794   $  (634,237)      $  (405,443)
Contributions made by
  members......................           --        --       325,000            --           325,000
Distributions paid to
  members......................           --        --       (20,743)           --           (20,743)
Net loss for the year ended
  December 31, 1996............           --        --            --      (613,124)         (613,124)
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
Balance as of December 31,
  1996.........................           --        --       533,051    (1,247,361)         (714,310)
Contributions made by members,
  net of offering costs of
  $254,098.....................           --        --     2,996,175            --         2,996,175
Distributions paid to
  members......................           --        --       (22,961)           --           (22,961)
Net loss for the year ended
  December 31, 1997............           --        --            --    (2,250,297)       (2,250,297)
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
Balance as of December 31,
  1997.........................           --        --     3,506,265    (3,497,658)            8,607
Net loss for the year ended
  December 31, 1998............           --        --            --    (2,137,381)       (2,137,381)
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
Balance as of December 31,
  1998.........................           --        --     3,506,265    (5,635,039)       (2,128,774)
Exercise of unit investment
  options (unaudited)..........           --        --       375,000            --           375,000
Net loss for the six months
  ended June 30, 1999
  (unaudited)..................           --        --            --      (130,495)         (130,495)
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
Balance as of June 30, 1999
  (unaudited)..................           --   $    --   $ 3,881,265   $(5,765,534)      $(1,884,269)
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
Pro forma adjustments (Note
  2(a)):
  Issuance of shares for member
    interests (unaudited)......   10,819,335    10,819    (5,776,353)    5,765,534                --
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
Pro forma balance as of June
  30, 1999 (unaudited).........   10,819,335   $10,819   $(1,895,088)  $        --       $(1,884,269)
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
  Issuance of common stock in
    connection with the
    Company's IPO, net of
    offering expenses
    (unaudited)................    3,125,000     3,125    45,396,875            --        45,400,000
                                 -----------   -------   -----------   -----------       -----------
Pro forma, as adjusted, balance
  as of June 30, 1999
  (unaudited)..................   13,944,335   $13,944   $43,501,787            --       $43,515,731
                                 ===========   =======   ===========   ===========       ===========
</TABLE>


                See accompanying notes to financial statements.
                                       F-5
<PAGE>   70

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                            STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                  YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1996, 1997 AND 1998
             AND FOR THE SIX MONTHS ENDED JUNE 30, 1998 (UNAUDITED)
                         AND JUNE 30, 1999 (UNAUDITED)


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                     SIX MONTHS ENDED
                                                                YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,                  JUNE 30,
                                                         -------------------------------------   -------------------------
                                                           1996         1997          1998          1998          1999
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
                                                                                                 (UNAUDITED)   (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                      <C>         <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>
Cash flows from operating activities:
  Net loss.............................................  $(613,124)  $(2,250,297)  $(2,137,381)  $(1,600,580)  $  (130,495)
  Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash used in
    operating activities:
    Equity loss from investment in Methodfive LLC .....         --        35,000        22,230        11,116        26,510
    Depreciation and amortization......................     74,816        99,751       193,410        96,706       316,987
    Provision for allowance for doubtful accounts......     26,000        25,483       (13,568)        1,282        (8,981)
    Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
      Increase in accounts receivable..................   (290,022)     (328,142)   (3,430,058)     (697,198)   (3,896,180)
      (Increase) decrease in inventory.................    (14,615)       24,035            --            --            --
      Increase in prepaid expenses and other assets....    (77,035)      (10,962)     (656,106)     (444,472)     (955,305)
      (Increase) decrease in security deposits.........    (24,938)        3,815       (79,589)      (80,790)      (66,841)
      Increase (decrease) in accounts payable..........    417,505       397,337        38,040        23,412      (429,002)
      Increase in accrued expenses.....................     87,357       298,300       606,858       374,731       708,072
      Increase in deferred revenue.....................    432,776       657,280     4,902,230     2,089,257     7,514,609
      (Decrease) increase in deferred rent.............     (4,262)      (13,138)       (3,016)        5,808       146,128
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
         Net cash provided by (used in) operating
           activities..................................     14,458    (1,061,538)     (556,950)     (220,728)    3,225,502
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
Cash flows from investing activities:
  Capital expenditures.................................   (198,651)     (206,842)     (838,037)     (258,078)   (2,263,121)
  Investment in Methodfive LLC ........................    (58,594)           --            --            --            --
  Investment in Internet Content Report................         --       (25,000)           --            --            --
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
         Net cash used in investing activities.........   (257,245)     (231,842)     (838,037)     (258,078)   (2,263,121)
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
Cash flows from financing activities:
  Member contributions.................................    325,000     3,250,273            --            --            --
  Exercise of unit investment options..................         --            --            --            --       375,000
  Offering costs.......................................         --      (254,098)           --            --            --
  Distributions paid to members........................    (20,743)      (22,961)           --            --            --
  Repayment of notes payable...........................    (55,000)      (70,000)           --            --            --
  Principal payments under capital lease obligation....     (2,841)       (3,447)       (2,919)           --            --
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
         Net cash provided by (used in) financing
           activities..................................    246,416     2,899,767        (2,919)           --       375,000
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
         Increase (decrease) in cash and cash
           equivalents.................................      3,629     1,606,387    (1,397,906)     (478,806)    1,337,381
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period.......      4,034         7,663     1,614,050     1,614,050       216,144
                                                         ---------   -----------   -----------   -----------   -----------
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period.............  $   7,663   $ 1,614,050   $   216,144   $ 1,135,244   $ 1,553,525
                                                         =========   ===========   ===========   ===========   ===========
Supplemental cash flow information:
  Cash paid during the period for:
    Interest...........................................  $      --   $     8,694   $    11,855   $        --   $        --
                                                         =========   ===========   ===========   ===========   ===========
Supplemental noncash operating and financing
  activities:
  Fair value of barter transactions....................  $ 105,974   $    18,120   $        --   $        --   $    25,000
                                                         =========   ===========   ===========   ===========   ===========
</TABLE>


                See accompanying notes to financial statements.
                                       F-6
<PAGE>   71

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                         NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

(1) ORGANIZATION

     Jupiter Communications, LLC ("Jupiter" or the "Company") was organized in
New York on December 1, 1994. Jupiter is a new media research firm that helps
companies make intelligent business decisions about consumer interactivity. The
Company's information services encompass Strategic Planning Services,
conferences, newsletters, book-length studies, and custom research reports and
provide clients and customers with focused research and strategic planning
support as they develop interactive products and services.

(2) SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

  (a) UNAUDITED INTERIM FINANCIAL INFORMATION AND UNAUDITED PRO FORMA BALANCE
SHEET

     The interim financial statements of the Company for the six months ended
June 30, 1998 and 1999 included herein have been prepared by the Company,
without audit, pursuant to the rules and regulations of the SEC. Certain
information and note disclosures normally included in financial statements
prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles have been
condensed or omitted pursuant to such rules and regulations relating to interim
financial statements.

     In the opinion of management, the accompanying unaudited interim financial
statements reflect all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring
adjustments, necessary to present fairly the financial position of the Company
at June 30, 1999 and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the
six months ended June 30, 1998 and 1999.


     The accompanying pro forma balance sheet as of June 30, 1999 gives effect
to the Company's pending reorganization from a limited liability company to a
"C" corporation (see Note 2(f)) as though the reorganization had occurred as of
June 30, 1999. The Company has determined that a deferred tax asset would result
upon the reorganization to a "C" corporation. The deferred tax asset will not be
presented as a pro forma adjustment because the Company would have provided for
a valuation allowance since utilization of the deferred tax asset is uncertain
based on the Company's history of net losses.



     The accompanying pro forma as adjusted balance sheet as of June 30, 1999
gives effect to the sale of 3,125,000 shares of common stock related to the
Company's proposed initial public offering ("IPO") (see Note 14 regarding the
proposed IPO) at an assumed initial public offering price of $16.00 per share
(less estimated underwriting discounts and offering expenses) as though the IPO
had occurred as of June 30, 1999.


  (b) CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

     Cash equivalents of $1,613,015, $211,681 and $1,470,060 at December 31,
1997, December 31, 1998 and June 30, 1999, respectively, consist of a money
market account with an initial term of less than three months. For purposes of
the statements of cash flows, the Company considers all highly liquid debt
instruments with original maturities of three months or less to be cash
equivalents.

  (c) PREPAID EXPENSES AND OTHER ASSETS

     Prepaid expenses and other assets primarily consist of prepaid Strategic
Planning Services commissions and prepaid conference costs.

  (d) PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT

     Property and equipment are stated at cost. Depreciation is provided by the
straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets,
which range from three to five years. Leasehold improvements are amortized on a
straight-line basis over the shorter of the lease term or their estimated useful
life. Additions and major improvements are capitalized, whereas the cost of
maintenance and repairs is charged to operations as incurred.

                                       F-7
<PAGE>   72
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

  (e) INTANGIBLE ASSETS

     Intangible assets are stated at cost and are amortized over their useful
lives. The net book value of intangible assets is periodically evaluated by
management as to the realizability by the Company with any permanent impairment
in such value charged to operations in the year so determined.

  (f) INCOME TAXES

     Until completion of the proposed IPO (see Note 14 regarding the proposed
IPO), the Company will remain a New York limited liability company. Accordingly,
income or loss attributed to the Company's operations prior to the closing of
the IPO will be allocated to its members to be reported on their personal tax
returns. As a result, Jupiter will not be able to offset future taxable income,
if any, against losses incurred prior to the closing of the IPO.

     Upon completion of the proposed IPO, the Company's LLC status will be
terminated as a result of the Company reorganizing to a "C" corporation for tax
purposes. Effective on this date, income taxes will be accounted for under the
asset and liability method. Under this method, deferred tax assets and
liabilities are recognized for future tax consequences attributable to
differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets
and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit
carryforwards. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted
tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those
temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on
deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in
results of operations in the period that the tax change occurs. Valuation
allowances are established, when necessary, to reduce deferred tax assets to the
amount expected to be realized.

  (g) REVENUE AND COMMISSION EXPENSE RECOGNITION

     Strategic Planning Services revenues are deferred and then reflected
proportionally in operations over the term of the service period, which is
generally up to one year. Conference revenues are reflected in operations when
the conference occurs. Newsletter subscriptions are deferred and then reflected
proportionally in operations over the term of the subscription, which is
generally up to one year. Book-length studies and custom research are reflected
in operations when the product is shipped.

     Deferred revenue is composed of prepaid Strategic Planning Services fees to
be earned in the future over the term of the service period, prepaid conference
sponsorship/exhibition fees to be earned from conferences held after the balance
sheet date, and prepaid newsletter subscriptions to be earned in the future over
the term of the subscriptions.

     The Company records prepaid commissions related to Strategic Planning
Services upon the signing of the contract and amortizes this corresponding
prepaid commission expense over the contract period in which the related
revenues are earned and amortized to income.

  (h) CONCENTRATION OF RISK

     The Company's customers are concentrated in the United States. The Company
performs ongoing credit evaluations of its customers' financial condition and
generally does not require collateral and establishes an allowance for doubtful
accounts based upon factors surrounding the credit risk of customers, historical
trends and other information. To date, such losses have been within management's
expectations.

     For each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 1998, no
customer accounted for more than 10% of revenues generated by the Company, or of
accounts receivable at December 31, 1998, 1997 and 1996.

                                       F-8
<PAGE>   73
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

  (i) USE OF ESTIMATES

     The accompanying financial statements are prepared in accordance with U.S.
generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). In preparing financial
statements in conformity with GAAP, management is required to make estimates and
assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, the
disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial
statements and revenue and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results
could differ from those estimates.

  (j) FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

     The carrying amount of cash and cash equivalents, accounts payable and
accrued expenses approximated fair value because of the relatively short
maturity of these instruments.

  (k) STOCK-BASED COMPENSATION

     The Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (SFAS) No.
123, "Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation," which permits entities to
recognize the fair value of all stock-based awards on the date of grant as
expense over the vesting period. Alternatively, SFAS No. 123 also allows
entities to continue to apply the provisions of APB Opinion No. 25, "Accounting
for Stock Issued to Employees," and provide pro forma net loss disclosures for
employee unit option grants made as if the fair value-based method defined in
SFAS No. 123 had been applied.

     Under APB Opinion No. 25, compensation expenses would be recorded on the
date of grant only if the current market price of the underlying units exceeded
the exercise price. The Company has elected to apply the provisions of APB
Opinion No. 25 and provide the pro forma disclosure provisions of SFAS No. 123.

  (l) PRO FORMA BASIC AND DILUTED NET LOSS PER COMMON SHARE

     Pro forma basic and diluted net loss per common share is computed by
dividing net loss by the pro forma weighted average number of shares of common
stock. Pro forma weighted average number of shares of common stock gives effect
to the Company's pending reorganization from a limited liability company to a
corporation (see Note 2(f)). Pro forma weighted average number of shares of
common stock does not include any common stock equivalents because inclusion of
common stock equivalents would have been anti-dilutive.

  (m) IMPAIRMENT OF LONG-LIVED ASSETS TO BE DISPOSED OF

     The Company applies the provisions of SFAS No. 121, "Accounting for the
Impairment of Long-Lived Assets and for Long-Lived Assets to Be Disposed Of,"
which requires that long-lived assets and certain identifiable intangibles be
reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate
that the carrying amount of an asset may not be recoverable. Recoverability of
assets to be held and used is measured by a comparison of the carrying amount of
an asset to future net cash flows expected to be generated by the asset. If such
assets are considered to be impaired, the impairment to be recognized is
measured by the amount by which the carrying amount of the assets exceeds the
fair value of the assets. Assets to be disposed of are reported at the lower of
the carrying amount or fair value less costs to sell. Adoption of this Statement
did not have a material impact on the Company's financial position, results of
operations or liquidity.

  (n) RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

     In April 1998, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
issued Statement of Position 98-1, "Accounting for the Costs of Computer
Software Developed or Obtained for Internal Use" ("SOP 98-1") which provides
guidance for determining whether computer software is internal-use

                                       F-9
<PAGE>   74
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

software and on accounting for the proceeds of computer software originally
developed or obtained for internal use and then subsequently sold to the public.
It also provides guidance on capitalization of the costs incurred for computer
software developed or obtained for internal use. SOP 98-1 will be effective for
the Company's fiscal year ending December 31, 1999. The adoption of SOP 98-1 is
not expected to have a material impact on the Company's financial statements.

     In April 1998, the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants
issued Statement of Position 98-5, "Reporting on the Costs of Start-Up
Activities" ("SOP 98-5") which provides guidance on the financial reporting of
start-up costs and organization costs. It requires costs of start-up activities
and organization costs to be expensed as incurred. SOP 98-5 will be effective
for the Company's fiscal year ending December 31, 1999. The adoption of SOP 98-5
is not expected to have a material impact on the Company's financial statements.


     In June 1997, the FASB issued SFAS No. 130, "Reporting Comprehensive
Income" which establishes standards for the reporting and display of
comprehensive income and its components in a full set of general purpose
financial statements. Comprehensive income generally represents all changes in
shareholders' equity during the period except those resulting from investments
by, or distributions to, shareholders. SFAS No. 130 is effective for fiscal
years beginning after December 15, 1997 and requires restatement of earlier
periods presented. The adoption of this standard has had no impact on the
Company's financial statements. Accordingly, the Company's comprehensive net
loss is equal to its net loss for all periods presented.


     In June 1997, the FASB issued SFAS No. 131, "Disclosures About Segments of
an Enterprise and Related Information" which establishes standards for the way
that a public enterprise reports information about operating segments in annual
financial statements, and requires that those enterprises report selected
information about operating segments in interim financial reports issued to
shareholders. It also establishes standards for related disclosures about
products and services, geographic areas and major customers. SFAS No. 131 is
effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 1997, and requires
restatement of earlier periods presented. In the initial year of application,
comparative information for earlier years must be restated. The Company has
determined that it does not have any separately reportable business segments.

     In June 1998, the FASB issued SFAS No. 133, "Accounting for Derivative
Instruments and Hedging Activities" which establishes accounting and reporting
standards for derivative instruments, including derivative instruments embedded
in other contracts, and for hedging activities. SFAS No. 133 is effective for
all fiscal quarters of fiscal years beginning after June 15, 2000. This
statement is not expected to affect the Company as it currently does not engage
or plan to engage in derivative instruments or hedging activities.

(3) PREPAID EXPENSES AND OTHER ASSETS

     Prepaid expenses and other assets consist of the following:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                DECEMBER 31,         JUNE 30,
                                                             -------------------   ------------
                                                               1997       1998         1999
                                                             --------   --------   ------------
                                                                                   (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                          <C>        <C>        <C>
Deferred SPS commissions...................................  $     --   $632,406    $1,313,315
Prepaid conference expenses................................   125,159    101,974       296,634
Other......................................................    15,903     62,788       142,524
                                                             --------   --------    ----------
                                                             $141,062   $797,168    $1,752,473
                                                             ========   ========    ==========
</TABLE>

                                      F-10
<PAGE>   75
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

(4) PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT

     Property and equipment consists of the following:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                DECEMBER 31,         JUNE 30,
                                                           ----------------------   -----------
                                                             1997         1998         1999
                                                           ---------   ----------   -----------
                                                                                    (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                        <C>         <C>          <C>
Computer equipment.......................................  $ 367,759   $  758,428   $1,954,597
Furniture and fixtures...................................     90,689      178,892      572,872
Office equipment.........................................     52,812       96,623      164,955
Leasehold improvements...................................     70,249      385,603      990,243
                                                           ---------   ----------   ----------
                                                             581,509    1,419,546    3,682,667
Less accumulated depreciation and amortization...........   (184,704)    (348,114)    (650,101)
                                                           ---------   ----------   ----------
                                                           $ 396,805   $1,071,432   $3,032,566
                                                           =========   ==========   ==========
</TABLE>

(5) INTANGIBLE ASSETS

     In June 1995, the Company acquired substantially all of the assets of the
Internet Business Report ("IBR") in exchange for a $140,000 promissory note,
payment of which was completed during 1997. The purchase price of $140,000 was
allocated as follows: $62,500 to the IBR subscriber list; $62,500 to the IBR
trademark; and $15,000 for the editorial costs which were subsequently written
off.

     In September 1997, the Company purchased the rights and interests in the
trademark "Internet Content Report" for $25,000. This included a subscriber list
with information regarding current and former subscribers. The purchase price
was allocated equally between the subscriber list and the trademark.

     Intangible assets consist of the following:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                DECEMBER 31,         JUNE 30,
                                            --------------------    -----------     AMORTIZATION
                                              1997        1998         1999        PERIOD IN YEARS
                                            --------    --------    -----------    ---------------
                                                                    (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                         <C>         <C>         <C>            <C>
Internet Content Report:
  Subscriber list.........................  $ 12,500    $ 12,500     $  12,500            5
  Trademark...............................    12,500      12,500        12,500            5
                                            --------    --------     ---------
                                              25,000      25,000        25,000
Internet Business Report:
  Subscriber list.........................    62,500      62,500        62,500            5
  Trademark...............................    62,500      62,500        62,500            5
                                            --------    --------     ---------
                                             125,000     125,000       125,000
Less accumulated amortization.............   (65,209)    (95,209)     (110,209)
                                            --------    --------     ---------
                                            $ 84,791    $ 54,791     $  39,791
                                            ========    ========     =========
</TABLE>

(6) INVESTMENT IN METHODFIVE LLC

     Jupiter has an investment in Methodfive LLC ("Methodfive"), formerly the
Myriad Agency, LLC, a Web site design and consulting company. For the years
ended December 31, 1997 and 1998, Methodfive experienced a net loss from
operations and the Company recorded its share of the loss in the accompanying
statements of operations and members' equity (deficiency). Jupiter's cumulative
interest in Methodfive as of December 31, 1997 and 1998 was approximately 17.4%
and has been accounted for under the equity method.

                                      F-11
<PAGE>   76
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

     As of June 30, 1999 the Company has written down its investment as a result
of the current financial position and recurring losses of Methodfive. The
Company has no future funding responsibilities with respect to Methodfive and
has a 17.4% passive interest.

(7) MEMBERS' EQUITY

     The Company has three classes of members' equity: Class A, Class B and
Class C. Class A, Class B and Class C equity members own respectively 33.5%,
29.2% and 37.3% of the Company, as of December 31, 1998. All equity members have
substantially the same rights and privileges, except that Class B equity members
do not participate in the day-to-day management of the business. Class C equity
members, as well, do not participate in the day-to-day management of the
business; however, certain actions, as defined in the operating agreement,
require the consent of Class C equity members.

     During October 1997, Gartner Group, Inc. ("acquiror") purchased 3,515,624
Class C units of the Company for $8.0 million from both the Company and existing
members. The Company amended its operating agreement to allow current members to
sell all or part of their units to the acquiror. During 1997, existing members
sold 2,197,265 units for $5.0 million, and 1,318,359 units were purchased from
the Company for $3.0 million and recorded as capital contributions by the
Company, less $254,098 in offering costs. Class A and Class B units sold by
existing members to the acquiror automatically converted to Class C units upon
transfer on a one-for-one basis to the acquiror. Three members sold 100% of
their units to the acquiror. In addition, during 1997 capital contributions of
$250,273 were made by existing Class A and B equity members. During 1998, an
existing member sold 333,333 units for $1.25 million to the acquiror. After
completion of the transactions, the acquiror owned 37.3% of all outstanding
units as of December 31, 1998, and had two seats on the board of members.

     Profits and losses are shared by all members based on their respective
percentage ownership interests. No member shall be liable for any debts of the
Company or be required to contribute any additional capital related to deficits
incurred.

(8) OPTIONS

     During 1997, the Company established the 1997 Employee Unit Option Plan
(the "Plan"). Under the Plan, 1,590,000 Class B units shall be available for
grant. On March 1, 1999, the equity members authorized an increase in the number
of units reserved for issuance under the Plan from 1,590,000 to 2,500,000 (see
Note 14). Unit options may be granted to key employees of the Company upon
selection by the managing members. The exercise price of a unit option shall be
equal to the established fair market value of the unit at the time of grant, in
accordance with the provisions of the Plan. These options vest ratably over a
four-year period.


     All unit options have a fixed term determinable by the managing members,
but no option shall be exercisable more than seven years after the date of
grant. Option exercisability is subject to the terms and conditions as
determined by the managing members. All unit options were granted with an
exercise price equal to the fair market value on the date of grant.


                                      F-12
<PAGE>   77
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

     Unit option activity under the Plan is as follows:


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                           WEIGHTED
                                                                UNIT       AVERAGE
                                                               OPTIONS     EXERCISE
                                                               GRANTED      PRICE
                                                              ---------    --------
<S>                                                           <C>          <C>
Outstanding at December 31, 1996............................         --
Granted.....................................................    704,738     $ .50
Exercised...................................................         --
Canceled....................................................         --
                                                              ---------
Outstanding at December 31, 1997............................    704,738     $ .50
                                                              ---------
Granted.....................................................    563,000     $2.08
Exercised...................................................         --
Canceled....................................................         --
                                                              ---------
Outstanding at December 31, 1998............................  1,267,738     $1.20
                                                              ---------
Granted (unaudited).........................................  1,163,650     $3.72
Exercised (unaudited).......................................         --
Canceled (unaudited)........................................    (44,532)    $2.38
                                                              ---------
Outstanding at June 30, 1999 (unaudited)....................  2,386,856     $2.41
                                                              =========
Vested at December 31, 1997.................................    217,912     $0.50
                                                              =========
Vested at December 31, 1998.................................    499,155     $0.50
                                                              =========
Vested at June 30, 1999 (unaudited).........................    672,723     $0.67
                                                              =========
</TABLE>



     The fair value of each unit option granted to employees during 1998 and
1997 is estimated using the Black-Scholes Option Pricing Model with the
following assumptions: 1998-dividend yield 0%, risk-free interest rate 6% and an
expected life of four years; 1997-dividend yield 0%, risk-free interest rate 8%
and an expected life of four years. As permitted under the provision of SFAS No.
123, and based on the historical lack of a public market for the Company's
units, no factor for volatility has been reflected in the unit option pricing
calculation.



     The following table summarizes information about unit options outstanding
under the Plan at December 31, 1998:



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                    OPTIONS OUTSTANDING                             OPTIONS EXERCISABLE
                    ---------------------------------------------------      ---------------------------------
                                       WEIGHTED
                                       AVERAGE             WEIGHTED                               WEIGHTED
   RANGE OF           NUMBER          REMAINING        AVERAGE EXERCISE         NUMBER        AVERAGE EXERCISE
EXERCISE PRICE      OUTSTANDING    CONTRACTUAL LIFE         PRICE             OUTSTANDING          PRICE
- --------------      -----------    ----------------    ----------------       -----------     ----------------
<S>                 <C>            <C>                 <C>                   <C>              <C>
  $    0.50           704,738         5.4 years           $    0.50              499,155         $    0.50
  $    1.75           412,500               6.4           $    1.75                   --         $    0.00
  $    3.00           150,500               6.9           $    3.00                   --         $    0.00
                     --------                                                -------------
                    1,267,738                                                    499,155
                     ========                                                =============
</TABLE>



     At December 31, 1998, the range of exercise prices and weighted-average
remaining contractual life of outstanding unit options under the Plan was
$0.50-$3.00 and 5.91 years, respectively.


     The Company applies APB Opinion No. 25 in accounting for its Plan and,
accordingly, no compensation cost has been recognized for its unit options in
the accompanying financial statements.

                                      F-13
<PAGE>   78
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

     The pro forma effect on the Company's net loss, had such options been
accounted for at fair value at the date of grant, is as follows:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                 1997           1998
<S>                                                           <C>            <C>
Net Loss:
  As Reported...............................................  $(2,250,297)   $(2,137,381)
                                                              ===========    ===========
  Pro Forma.................................................  $(2,269,149)   $(2,216,536)
                                                              ===========    ===========
</TABLE>


     In addition to the units granted under the Plan, during November 1996, the
Company granted unit investment options to three equity members in conjunction
with contributions made by those equity members. A total of 667,968 unit
investment options were granted at a weighted average exercise price of $0.75.
All unit options were granted with an exercise price equal to the fair market
value on the date of grant. The unit investment options were immediately vested
and are exercisable at any time during the period ending on the earlier of (a)
October 31, 2001 or (b) the closing of an initial public offering.


     During May 1999, two of the equity members exercised 500,976 unit
investment options at a weighted average exercise price of $0.75. As a result,
166,992 unit investment options remain outstanding related to one equity member
at a weighted average exercise price of $0.75.

(9) DEFERRED REVENUE

     Deferred revenue consists of the following:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                              DECEMBER 31,            JUNE 30,
                                                        ------------------------    ------------
                                                           1997          1998           1999
                                                        ----------    ----------    ------------
                                                                                    (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                     <C>           <C>           <C>
Strategic Planning Services...........................  $  614,472    $5,638,847    $11,486,016
Conferences...........................................     359,337       783,912      2,540,442
Newsletter subscriptions..............................     801,194       254,474        165,384
                                                        ----------    ----------    -----------
                                                        $1,775,003    $6,677,233    $14,191,842
                                                        ==========    ==========    ===========
</TABLE>

(10) OTHER REVENUES

     Other revenues consist of the following:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                   DECEMBER 31,                       JUNE 30,
                                       ------------------------------------   -------------------------
                                          1996         1997         1998         1998          1999
                                       ----------   ----------   ----------   -----------   -----------
                                                                              (UNAUDITED)   (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                    <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>           <C>
Book length studies..................  $1,488,705   $1,518,545   $1,681,114   $  884,859    $  831,582
Newsletter subscriptions.............   1,130,377    1,492,000    1,470,380      853,597       337,890
Other................................     381,511      235,374      577,946      200,589       511,251
                                       ----------   ----------   ----------   ----------    ----------
                                       $3,000,593   $3,245,919   $3,729,440   $1,939,045    $1,680,723
                                       ==========   ==========   ==========   ==========    ==========
</TABLE>

                                      F-14
<PAGE>   79
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

(11) BARTER TRANSACTIONS

     During 1997, the Company entered into barter transactions by exchanging its
products for advertising. Barter revenue and expenses are recorded at the fair
market value of services provided or received, whichever is more determinable in
the circumstances. The value of these transactions was $105,974 and $18,120 for
the years ended December 31, 1996 and 1997, respectively. No such transactions
were entered into by the Company during 1998.

(12) 401(k) PROFIT SHARING PLAN

     The Company has a 401(k) profit sharing plan for its employees. Employees
who have completed one year of service and attained age 21 are eligible to
participate. The Company makes a matching contribution equal to 50% for every
one dollar of each participant's contribution and applies such matching
percentage to the participant's salary reduction, up to 6% of the participant's
compensation. During 1996, 1997 and 1998, the Company's matching contribution
was $10,639, $12,435 and $38,882, respectively.

(13) COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

  (a) OFFICE LEASES

     The Company leases office space in New York City and London. The future
minimum annual rental commitments under the leases are:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDING DECEMBER 31,
<S>                                                           <C>
  1999......................................................  $  515,113
  2000......................................................     625,536
  2001......................................................     734,024
  2002......................................................     655,491
  2003......................................................     677,844
  2004 and thereafter.......................................     218,318
                                                              ----------
                                                              $3,426,326
                                                              ==========
</TABLE>

     Rent expense for the years ended December 31, 1996, 1997 and 1998 was
$111,433, $335,063 and $303,061, respectively.

     During April 1998, the Company entered into a seven-year operating lease
agreement for office space in London. The lease agreement calls for monthly
payments with no scheduled increase in succeeding periods.

     During January 1999, the Company terminated its existing New York operating
lease agreements that were due to expire in May 2000 and December 2001 and
signed a new five-year operating lease agreement with the same landlord. The new
lease agreement covers the same office space as the terminated lease agreement
as well as additional office space. In connection with this lease agreement, the
Company received two months of free rent. The agreement also calls for scheduled
increases in succeeding periods. As such, the Company records rent expense on a
straight-line basis. The future payments related to this new lease agreement are
reflected in the above schedule, and the deferred rent balance as of June 30,
1999 reflects the impact of the new lease.

                                      F-15
<PAGE>   80
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

  (b) EQUIPMENT LEASE

     Future minimum lease payments under noncancellable operating leases as of
December 31, 1998 are:

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
YEAR ENDING DECEMBER 31,
<S>                                                           <C>
  1999......................................................  $ 42,370
  2000......................................................    47,956
  2001......................................................    47,956
  2002......................................................    38,671
  2003......................................................    18,840
  Thereafter................................................     4,710
                                                              --------
     Total..................................................  $200,503
                                                              ========
</TABLE>

(14) SUBSEQUENT EVENTS (UNAUDITED)

  a) INITIAL PUBLIC OFFERING

     In July 1999, the Class A equity members authorized the filing of a
registration statement with the Securities and Exchange Commission ("SEC") that
would permit the Company to sell shares of its common stock in connection with
the proposed IPO.

     Upon the completion of the proposed IPO, the Company will be reorganized
from a limited liability company (LLC) to a corporation, which will be treated
as a "C" corporation for tax purposes. All of the members of the LLC will
exchange their respective member interests in the LLC for shares of common stock
in the corporation.

     After the IPO, the members no longer retain the rights granted to them as
part of the Company's Operating Agreement, other than piggyback registration
rights and, with respect to the Class C equity member, limited indemnification
rights.

  b) LINE OF CREDIT

     During March 1999, the Company entered into an agreement for a line of
credit of $750,000 with the Silicon Valley Bank. Any unpaid balance is payable
on demand and bears an interest rate of prime plus 1%. All of the Company's
assets were listed as collateral in the event of default. No amounts were
outstanding as of March 31, 1999.


     During September 1999, the Company increased this line of credit to $3.0
million. Any unpaid balance is payable on demand and bears an interest rate of
prime plus 1 1/2%. In the event that the Company raises an additional $3 million
of equity financing, the interest rate on the $3 million line of credit will be
reduced to prime plus  3/4%.


  c) ADVERTISING COMMITMENTS

     In 1999, the Company entered into certain advertising contracts and has
future advertising commitments with a publishing company in the amount of
approximately $500,000.

  d) UNIT OPTION PLAN

     In March 1999, the equity members authorized an increase in the number of
units reserved for issuance under the Plan from 1,590,000 to 2,500,000.

                                      F-16
<PAGE>   81
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
                  DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1998 AND JUNE 30, 1999
         (ALL INFORMATION SUBSEQUENT TO DECEMBER 31, 1998 IS UNAUDITED)

     In July 1999, the equity members authorized an additional increase in the
number of units reserved for issuance under the Plan from 2,500,000 to
2,750,000.

  e) CLASS B (NON-VOTING) UNITS

     In July 1999, the equity members authorized the Company to issue Class B
(Non-Voting) units which shall provide Jupiter with, among other things,
flexibility in the issuance of units in connection with mergers, acquisitions
and/or similar transactions and in the exercise of options. Holders of Class B
(Non-Voting) units shall have the same rights and privileges as holders of Class
B units, except for certain specified rights.

  f) ACQUISITION OF INTELLIGENCE SE AB

     In July 1999, the Company acquired all of the stock of Intelligence SE AB,
a Swedish research company, in exchange for 137,000 Class B (Non-Voting) units
at an aggregate value of $808,000.

  g) SALE OF UNITS BY MEMBERS

     On May 25, 1999, two equity members sold a total of 254,238 units to other
existing equity members.

  h) NON-PLAN OPTIONS


     During 1999, the Company issued options to purchase 7,500 Class B units
outside of the Plan to third parties for services rendered at a fair value
exercise price of $3.00.


                                      F-17
<PAGE>   82
Back Cover:

There are forty-two small black-and-white photographs of various Jupiter
analysts. On the bottom of the page is text that reads: "JUPITER ANALYSTS help
senior executives at large and small companies in a wide range of industries
make difficult, complex, and informed business decisions in the rapidly changing
Internet economy."

[Jupiter Logo] Online Intelligence

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------



<PAGE>   83

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

            , 1999

                         [JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS LOGO]


                        3,125,000 SHARES OF COMMON STOCK


                           -------------------------

                                   PROSPECTUS
                           -------------------------

                          DONALDSON, LUFKIN & JENRETTE
                           DEUTSCHE BANC ALEX. BROWN
                           THOMAS WEISEL PARTNERS LLC

                                 DLJdirect INC.

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

We have not authorized any dealer, salesperson or other person to give you
written information other than this prospectus or to make representations as to
matters not stated in this prospectus. You must not rely on unauthorized
information. This prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities or our
solicitation of your offer to buy the securities in any jurisdiction where that
would not be permitted or legal. Neither the delivery of this prospectus nor any
sales made hereunder after the date of this prospectus shall create an
implication that the information contained herein or the affairs of Jupiter
Communications, Inc. have not changed since the date hereof.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Until           1999 (25 days after the date of this prospectus) all dealers
that effect transactions in these shares of common stock may be required to
deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to the dealer's obligation to deliver
a prospectus when acting as an underwriter and with respect to their unsold
allotments or subscriptions.
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<PAGE>   84

                                    PART II

                     INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

ITEM 13.  OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION

     The following table sets forth an estimate of the costs and expenses, other
than the underwriting discounts and commissions, payable by the registrant in
connection with the issuance and distribution of the common stock being
registered.

<TABLE>
<S>                                                           <C>
SEC registration fee........................................  $   15,985
NASD fee....................................................       6,250
NASDAQ listing fee..........................................      88,500
Legal fees and expenses.....................................     350,000
Accounting fees and expenses................................     300,000
Printing expenses...........................................     250,000
Blue sky fees and expenses..................................      10,000
Transfer Agent and Registrar fees and expenses..............      12,500
Miscellaneous...............................................      66,765
                                                              ----------
          Total.............................................  $1,100,000
                                                              ==========
</TABLE>

ITEM 14.  INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

     The registrant's certificate of incorporation in effect as of the date
hereof, and the registrant's amended and restated certificate of incorporation
to be in effect upon the closing of this offering (collectively, the
"Certificate") provide that, except to the extent prohibited by the Delaware
General Corporation Law, as amended (the "DGCL"), the registrant's directors
shall not be personally liable to the registrant or its stockholders for
monetary damages for any breach of fiduciary duty as directors of the
registrant. Under the DGCL, the directors have a fiduciary duty to the
registrant which is not eliminated by this provision of the Certificate and, in
appropriate circumstances, equitable remedies such as injunctive or other forms
of non-monetary relief will remain available. In addition, each director will
continue to be subject to liability under the DGCL for breach of the director's
duty of loyalty to the registrant, for acts or omissions which are found by a
court of competent jurisdiction to be not in good faith or involving intentional
misconduct, for knowing violations of law, for actions leading to improper
personal benefit to the director, and for payment of dividends or approval of
stock repurchases or redemptions that are prohibited by DGCL. This provision
also does not affect the directors' responsibilities under any other laws, such
as the Federal securities laws or state or Federal environmental laws. The
registrant intends to obtain liability insurance for its officers and directors
prior to the closing of this offering.

     Section 145 of the DGCL empowers a corporation to indemnify its directors
and officers and to purchase insurance with respect to liability arising out of
their capacity or status as directors and officers, provided that this provision
shall not eliminate or limit the liability of a director: (i) for any breach of
the director's duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for
acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a
knowing violation of law, (iii) arising under Section 174 of the DGCL, or (iv)
for any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal
benefit. The DGCL provides further that the indemnification permitted thereunder
shall not be deemed exclusive of any other rights to which the directors and
officers may be entitled under the corporation's bylaws, any agreement, a vote
of stockholders or otherwise. The Certificate eliminates the personal liability
of directors to the fullest extent permitted by Section 102(b)(7) of the DGCL
and provides that the registrant shall fully indemnify any person who was or is
a party or is threatened to be made a party to any threatened, pending or
completed action, suit or proceeding (whether civil, criminal, administrative or
investigative) by reason of the fact that such person is or was a director or
officer of the registrant, or is or was serving at the request of the registrant
as a director or officer of another corporation, partnership, joint venture,
trust, employee benefit plan or other enterprise, against expenses (including
attorney's fees), judgments, fines
                                      II-1
<PAGE>   85

and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by such person
in connection with such action, suit or proceeding.

     At present, there is no pending litigation or proceeding involving any
director, officer, employee or agent as to which indemnification will be
required or permitted under the Certificate. The registrant is not aware of any
threatened litigation or proceeding that may result in a claim for such
indemnification.

ITEM 15.  RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES

     Within the last three years, the registrant has sold and issued the
following securities:

     Units.  Between November 1996 and February 1997, the registrant sold
approximately 11% of the company to Kurt Abrahamson, Joshua A. Weinreich and
Narain Gehani, for an aggregate purchase price of $500,000. In addition, the
registrant granted these individuals options to purchase an additional 667,968
units at a weighted average exercise price of $0.75. In October 1997, Gartner
Group purchased 1,318,359 Class C units from Jupiter Communications, LLC for a
total of $3.0 million.

     Upon the closing of this offering, Jupiter Communications, LLC will merge
with and into Jupiter Communications, Inc. In connection with this merger, all
membership units in Jupiter Communications, LLC will be exchanged for shares of
common stock of Jupiter Communications, Inc. The sales of the above securities
were deemed to be exempt from registration pursuant to Section 4(2) of the
Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

     Options.  The registrant has from time to time granted options to purchase
units in Jupiter Communications, LLC in reliance upon exemptions from
registration pursuant to either Section 4(2) of the Securities Act of 1933, as
amended, or Rule 701 promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
The following table sets forth certain information regarding such grants:


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                              WEIGHTED
                                                              NUMBER OF       AVERAGE
                                                                UNITS      EXERCISE PRICE
                                                              ---------    --------------
<S>                                                           <C>          <C>
August 1, 1996 to December 31, 1996.........................    667,968        $ 0.75
January 1, 1997 to December 31, 1997........................    704,738        $ 0.50
January 1, 1998 to December 31, 1998........................    563,000        $ 2.08
January 1, 1999 to September 16, 1999.......................  1,459,775        $ 4.57
</TABLE>


     The sales of the above securities were deemed to be exempt from
registration pursuant to either Section 4(2) of the Securities Act of 1933, as
amended, or Rule 701 promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
The recipients of securities in each of these transactions represented their
intention to acquire the securities for investment only and not with view to or
for sale in connection with any distribution thereof and appropriate legends
were affixed to the share certificates and instruments issued in such
transactions. All recipients had adequate access, through their relationship
with the Registrant, to information about the Registrant.

ITEM 16.  EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

     (a) Exhibits


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXHIBIT
NUMBER                            DESCRIPTION
<C>       <S>
   1.1*   Form of underwriting agreement.
  3.1**   Certificate of incorporation.
   3.2    Form of amended and restated certificate of incorporation to
          be in effect upon the closing of this offering.
  3.3**   Bylaws.
  3.4**   Form of amended and restated bylaws to be in effect upon the
          closing of this offering.
</TABLE>


                                      II-2
<PAGE>   86


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXHIBIT
NUMBER                            DESCRIPTION
<C>       <S>
   4.1    Specimen common stock certificate.
   4.2    Please see Exhibits 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 for provisions of
          the certificate of incorporation and bylaws of the
          registrant defining the rights of holders of common stock of
          the registrant.
  5.1**   Opinion of Brobeck, Phleger & Harrison LLP.
 10.1**   Employment Agreement, dated as of October 22, 1997, between
          the registrant and Gene DeRose.
 10.2**   Employment Agreement, dated as of October 22, 1997, between
          the registrant and Kurt Abrahamson.
 10.3**   1997 Option Plan.
  10.4    1999 Stock Incentive Plan.
  10.5    1999 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
 10.6**   Form of registration rights agreement to be in effect upon
          the closing of this offering.
 10.7**   Lease, dated April 7, 1998, between Abbey Life Assurance
          Company Limited and the registrant.
 10.8**   Agreement of Lease, dated as of November 21, 1996, between
          625 Properties Associates and the registrant.
 10.9**   Agreement of Lease, dated as of January 25, 1999, between
          Renaissance 627 Broadway LLC and the registrant.
  23.1    Consent of KPMG LLP.
 23.2**   Consent of Brobeck, Phleger & Harrison LLP (included in
          Exhibit 5.1).
 24.1**   Powers of Attorney (please see Signature Page).
 27.1**   Financial Data Schedule.
</TABLE>


- ------------------------------
 * To be filed by amendment.


** Previously filed.


     (b) Financial Statement Schedules

Schedule II--Valuation and Qualifying Accounts

ITEM 17.  UNDERTAKINGS

     The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the Underwriters
at the closing specified in the Underwriting Agreement certificates in such
denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to
permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.

     Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act
of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the
registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant
has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission
such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities
Act, and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for
indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the
registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling
person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or
proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in
connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in
the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent,
submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question of whether such
indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Securities
Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.

     The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:

          (1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act
     of 1933, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part
     of this registration statement in reliance upon

                                      II-3
<PAGE>   87

     Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the Registrant
     pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497 (h) under the Securities Act of
     1933 shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the
     time it was declared effective.

          (2) For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities
     Act of 1933, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of
     prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to
     the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that
     time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

                                      II-4
<PAGE>   88


                                   SIGNATURES



     Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the registrant
has duly caused this Amendment No. 2 to the registration statement to be signed
on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of New
York, State of New York, on this 20th day of September, 1999.



                                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.



                                          By: /s/      GENE DEROSE

                                            ------------------------------------

                                                        Gene DeRose


                                                  Chief Executive Officer



     Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this Amendment
No. 2 to the registration statement has been signed by the following persons in
the capacities indicated on September 20, 1999:



<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                      SIGNATURE                                           TITLE(S)
                      ---------                                           --------
<C>                                                    <S>

                   /s/ GENE DEROSE                     Chief Executive Officer and Chairman of the
- -----------------------------------------------------    Board of Directors
                     Gene DeRose                         (Principal Executive Officer)

                  /s/ JEAN ROBINSON                    Chief Financial Officer
- -----------------------------------------------------    (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)
                    Jean Robinson

                          *                            President, Chief Operating Officer and
- -----------------------------------------------------    Director
                   Kurt Abrahamson

                          *                            Director
- -----------------------------------------------------
                    Robert Kavner
</TABLE>



*By: /s/         GENE DEROSE

     --------------------------------------

                  Gene DeRose


                Attorney-in-fact


                                      II-5
<PAGE>   89

                                  SCHEDULE II

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, LLC

                       VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                 BALANCE AT     PROVISION                    BALANCE AT
                                                 BEGINNING     FOR DOUBTFUL                    END OF
                                                 OF PERIOD       ACCOUNTS      DEDUCTIONS      PERIOD
                                                 ----------    ------------    ----------    ----------
<S>                                              <C>           <C>             <C>           <C>
For the year ended December 31, 1996
  Allowance for doubtful accounts..............   $    --        $26,000        $     --      $26,000
                                                  =======        =======        ========      =======
For the year ended December 31, 1997
  Allowance for doubtful accounts..............   $$26,000       $25,483        $     --      $51,483
                                                  =======        =======        ========      =======
For the year ended December 31, 1998
  Allowance for doubtful accounts..............   $51,483        $    --        $(13,568)     $37,915
                                                  =======        =======        ========      =======
</TABLE>

                                      II-6
<PAGE>   90

                                 EXHIBIT INDEX


<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXHIBIT
NUMBER                            DESCRIPTION
<C>       <S>
  1.1*    Form of underwriting agreement.
  3.1**   Certificate of incorporation.
  3.2     Form of amended and restated certificate of incorporation to
          be in effect upon the closing of this offering.
  3.3**   Bylaws.
  3.4**   Form of amended and restated bylaws to be in effect upon the
          closing of this offering.
  4.1     Specimen common stock certificate.
  4.2     Please see Exhibits 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4 for provisions of
          the certificate of incorporation and bylaws of the
          registrant defining the rights of holders of common stock of
          the registrant.
  5.1**   Opinion of Brobeck, Phleger & Harrison LLP.
 10.1**   Employment Agreement, dated as of October 22, 1997, between
          the registrant and Gene DeRose.
 10.2**   Employment Agreement, dated as of October 22, 1997, between
          the registrant and Kurt Abrahamson.
 10.3**   1997 Option Plan.
 10.4     1999 Stock Incentive Plan.
 10.5     1999 Employee Stock Purchase Plan.
 10.6**   Form of registration rights agreement to be in effect upon
          the closing of this offering.
 10.7**   Lease, dated April 7, 1998, between Abbey Life Assurance
          Company Limited and the registrant.
 10.8**   Agreement of Lease, dated as of November 21, 1996, between
          625 Properties Associates and the registrant.
 10.9**   Agreement of Lease, dated as of January 25, 1999, between
          Renaissance 627 Broadway LLC and the registrant.
 23.1     Consent of KPMG LLP.
 23.2**   Consent of Brobeck, Phleger & Harrison LLP (included in
          Exhibit 5.1).
 24.1**   Powers of Attorney (please see Signature Page).
 27.1**   Financial Data Schedule.
</TABLE>


- ------------------------------
 * To be filed by amendment.


** Previously filed.


<PAGE>   1
                                                                     Exhibit 3.2

                AMENDED AND RESTATED CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION

                                       OF

                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.


                  (Pursuant to Sections 228, 242 and 245 of the
                General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware)



                Jupiter Communications, Inc. (the "Corporation"), a
corporation organized and existing under the General Corporation Law of the
State of Delaware (the "General Corporation Law"),

                  DOES HEREBY CERTIFY:

                  FIRST: That the Corporation was originally incorporated in
Delaware, and the date of its filing of its original Certificate of
Incorporation with the Secretary of State of Delaware was June 21, 1999.

                  SECOND: That the Board of Directors duly adopted resolutions
proposing to amend and restate the Certificate of Incorporation of the
Corporation, declaring said amendment and restatement to be advisable and in the
best interests of the Corporation and its stockholders, and authorizing the
appropriate officers of the Corporation to solicit the consent of the
stockholders, all in accordance with the applicable provisions of Sections 228,
242 and 245 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware;

                  THIRD: That the resolution setting forth the proposed
amendment and restatement is as follows:

                  RESOLVED, that the Amended and Restated of Certificate of
                  Incorporation of the Corporation be amended and restated in
                  its entirety as follows:



                                    ARTICLE I

                                      Name

           The name of the Corporation is Jupiter Communications, Inc.
<PAGE>   2
                                   ARTICLE II

                                Registered Office

                  The address of the registered office of the Corporation in the
State of Delaware is Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, City of
Wilmington, County of New Castle, Delaware 19801 and the name of the registered
agent at that address is the Corporation Trust Company.



                                   ARTICLE III

                                   Powers/Term

                  The purpose of the Corporation is to engage in any lawful act
or activity for which a corporation may be organized under the General
Corporation Law. The Corporation is to have perpetual existence.



                                   ARTICLE IV

                                  Capital Stock


                  A. Classes of Stock. The total number of shares of stock which
the Corporation shall have authority to issue is one hundred and five million
(105,000,000), consisting of five million (5,000,000) shares of Preferred Stock,
par value $.001 per share (the "Preferred Stock"), and one hundred million
(100,000,000) shares of Common Stock, par value $.001 per share (the "Common
Stock").


                  B. Preferred Stock. The Preferred Stock may be issued from
time to time in one or more series. The Board of Directors is hereby authorized
to provide for the issuance of shares of Preferred Stock in one or more series
and, by filing a certificate pursuant to the applicable law of the State of
Delaware (the "Preferred Stock Designation"), to establish from time to time the
number of shares to be included in each such series, and to fix the designation,
powers, preferences and rights of the shares of each such series and the
qualifications, limitations and restrictions thereof. The authority of the Board
of Directors with respect to each series shall include, but not be limited to,
determination of the following:

                  (a) The designation of the series, which may be by
distinguishing number, letter or title.

                  (b) The number of shares of the series, which number the Board
of Directors may thereafter (except where otherwise provided in the Preferred
Stock Designation) increase or decrease (but not below the number of shares
thereof then outstanding).


                                       2
<PAGE>   3
                  (c) The amounts payable on, and the preferences, if any, of
shares of the series in respect of dividends, and whether such dividends, if
any, shall be cumulative or noncumulative.

                  (d) Dates at which dividends, if any, shall be payable.

                  (e) The redemption rights and price or prices, if any, for
shares of the series.

                  (f) The terms and amount of any sinking funds provided for the
purchase or redemption of shares of the series.

                  (g) The amounts payable on, and the preferences, if any, of
shares of the series in the event of any voluntary or involuntary liquidation,
dissolution or winding up of the affairs of the Corporation.

                  (h) Whether the shares of the series shall be convertible into
or exchangeable for shares of any other class or series, or any other security,
of the Corporation or any other corporation, and, if so, the specification of
such other class or series or such other security, the conversion or exchange
price or prices or rate or rates, any adjustments thereof, the date or dates at
which such shares shall be convertible or exchangeable and all other terms and
conditions upon which such conversion or change may be made.

                  (i) Restrictions on the issuance of shares of the same series
or of any other class or series.

                  (j) The voting rights, if any, of the holders of shares of the
series.

                  C. Common Stock; Voting. The Common Stock shall be subject to
the express terms of the Preferred Stock and any series thereof. Except as may
otherwise be provided in this Certificate of Incorporation, in a Preferred Stock
Designation or by applicable law, the holders of shares of Common Stock shall be
entitled to one vote for each such share upon all questions presented to the
stockholders, the Common Stock shall have the exclusive right to vote for the
election of directors and for all other purposes, and holders of Preferred Stock
shall not be entitled to vote at or receive notice of any meeting of
stockholders.

                  The number of shares of authorized Common Stock may be
increased or decreased (but not below the number then outstanding) by the
affirmative vote of the holders of a majority in voting power of the outstanding
shares of capital stock of the Corporation entitled to vote thereon, voting
together as a single class notwithstanding the provisions of Section 242(b)(2)
of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware.

                  The Corporation shall be entitled to treat the person in whose
name any share of its stock is registered as the owner thereof for all purposes
and shall not be bound to recognize any equitable or other claim to, or interest
in, such share on the part of any other person whether or not the Corporation
shall have notice thereof, except as expressly provided by applicable law.

                                       3
<PAGE>   4
                                    ARTICLE V

                                    Directors


                  A. Number. The number of directors of the Corporation shall be
such number, not less than three (3) nor more than fifteen (15) (exclusive of
directors, if any, to be elected by holders of preferred stock of the
Corporation, voting separately as a class), as shall be set forth from time to
time in the bylaws, provided that no action shall be taken to decrease the
number of directors to less than three or increase the number of directors to
greater than fifteen unless at least 66.67% of the outstanding shares of capital
stock of the Corporation entitled to vote generally in the election of directors
(considered for this purpose as one class) cast at a meeting of the stockholders
called for that purpose approve such decrease or increase. Vacancies in the
Board of Directors of the Corporation, however caused, and newly created
directorships shall be filled by a vote of a majority of the directors then in
office, whether or not a quorum, and any director so chosen shall hold office
for a term expiring at the annual meeting of stockholders at which the term of
the class to which the director has been chosen expires and when the director's
successor is elected and qualified.


                  B. Classified Board of Directors. The Board of Directors shall
be and is divided into three classes: Class I, Class II and Class III, each of
which shall be as nearly equal in number as possible. Each director shall serve
for a term ending on the date of the third annual meeting of stockholders
following the annual meeting at which the director was elected; provided,
however, that each initial director in Class I shall hold office until the
annual meeting of stockholders in 2000; each initial director in Class II shall
hold office until the annual meeting of stockholders in 2001; and each initial
director in Class III shall hold office until the annual meeting of stockholders
in 2002. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this ARTICLE V, each
director shall serve until his successor is duly elected and qualified or until
his death, resignation or removal.

                  Subject to the provisions of this ARTICLE V, should the number
of directors not be equally divisible by three, the excess director or directors
shall be assigned to Classes II or III as follows: (i) if there shall be an
excess of one directorship over a number equally divisible by three, such extra
directorship shall be classified in Class III; and (ii) if there shall be an
excess of two directorships over a number divisible by three, one shall be
classified in Class II and the other in Class III.

                  In the event of any increase or decrease in the authorized
number of directors, (1) each director than serving as such shall nevertheless
continue as a director of the class of which he is a member until the expiration
of his current term, or his earlier resignation, removal from office or death,
and (2) the newly created or eliminated directorship resulting from such
increase or decrease shall be appointed by the Board of Directors among the
three classes of directors so as to maintain such classes as nearly equal as
possible.

                  C. Removal of Directors. Notwithstanding any other provisions
of this Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation or the bylaws of the
Corporation, any director or the entire Board of Directors of the Corporation
may be removed, at any time, but

                                       4
<PAGE>   5
only for cause and only by the affirmative vote of the holders of not less
than 66.67% of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation
entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (considered for this
purpose as one class) cast at a meeting of the stockholders called for that
purpose. Notwithstanding the foregoing, whenever the holders of any one or more
series of preferred stock of the Corporation shall have the right, voting
separately as a class, to elect one or more directors of the Corporation, the
preceding provisions of this ARTICLE V shall not apply with respect to the
director or directors elected by such holders of preferred stock.


                                   ARTICLE VI

                              Stockholder Meetings

                  Meetings of stockholders may be held within or without the
State of Delaware, as the bylaws may provide. The books of the Corporation may
be kept (subject to any provision contained in the statutes) outside the State
of Delaware at such place or places as may be designated from time to time by
the Board of Directors or in the bylaws of the Corporation. The stockholders of
the Corporation may not take any action by written consent in lieu of a meeting.


                                   ARTICLE VII

                       Limitation of Directors' Liability

                  A director of the Corporation shall not be liable to the
Corporation or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary
duty as a director, except to the extent such exemption from liability or
limitation thereof is not permitted under the General Corporation Law of the
State of Delaware as the same exists or may hereafter be amended. Any amendment,
modification or repeal of the foregoing sentence shall not adversely affect any
right or protection of a director of the Corporation hereunder in respect of any
act or omission occurring prior to the time of such amendment, modification or
repeal. If the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware is amended after
approval by the stockholders of this ARTICLE VII to authorize corporate action
further eliminating or limiting the personal liability of directors, then the
liability of a director shall be eliminated or limited to the fullest extent
permitted by the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, as so
amended.



                                  ARTICLE VIII

                                 Indemnification

                  A. Right to Indemnification. The Corporation shall indemnify
and hold harmless, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law as it
presently exists or may hereafter be amended, any person (a "Covered Person")
who was or is made or is threatened to be made a party or is otherwise involved
in any action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or
investigative (a "proceeding"), by reason of the fact that he is or was or has

                                       5
<PAGE>   6
agreed to become, or a person for whom he is the legal representative, is or was
or has agreed to become a director or officer of the Corporation or, while a
director or officer of the Corporation, is or was serving at the request of the
Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation or
of a partnership, joint venture, trust, enterprise or nonprofit entity,
including service with respect to employee benefit plans, against all liability
and loss suffered and expenses (including attorneys' fees) reasonably incurred
by such Covered Person. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, except as
otherwise provided in this Article VIII, the Corporation shall be required to
indemnify a Covered Person in connection with a proceeding (or part thereof)
commenced by such Covered Person only if the commencement of such proceeding (or
part thereof) by the Covered Person was authorized by the Board of Directors of
the Corporation. The rights to indemnification provided herein shall continue
with respect to a Covered Person notwithstanding that such Covered Person ceases
to be a director, officer or other employee or agent of the Corporation.

                  B. Prepayment of Expenses. The Corporation shall pay the
expenses (including attorneys' fees) incurred by a Covered Person in defending
any proceeding in advance of its final disposition, provided, however, that, to
the extent required by law, such payment of expenses in advance of the final
disposition of the proceeding shall be made only upon receipt of an undertaking
by the Covered Person to repay all amounts advanced if it should be ultimately
determined that the Covered Person is not entitled to be indemnified under this
Article VIII or otherwise.

                  C. Claims. If a claim for indemnification or advancement of
expenses under this Article VIII is not paid in full within thirty days after a
written claim therefor by the Covered Person has been received by the
Corporation, the Covered Person may file suit to recover the unpaid amount of
such claim and, if successful in whole or in part, shall be entitled to be paid
the expense of prosecuting such claim. In any such action the Corporation shall
have the burden of proving that the Covered Person is not entitled to the
requested indemnification or advancement of expenses under applicable law.

                  D. Nonexclusivity of Rights. The rights conferred on any
Covered Person by this Article VIII shall not be exclusive of any other rights
which such Covered Person may have or hereafter acquire under any statute,
provision of the certificate of incorporation, the bylaws, agreement, vote of
stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise. The Corporation may, to
the extent authorized from time to time by its Board of Directors, grant
indemnification rights to other employees or agents of the Corporation or other
persons serving the Corporation and such rights may be equivalent to, or greater
or less than, those provided herein.

                  E. Other Sources. The Corporation's obligation, if any, to
indemnify or to advance expenses to any Covered person who was or is serving at
its request as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation,
partnership, joint venture, trust, enterprise or nonprofit entity shall be
reduced by any amount such Covered Person may collect as indemnification or
advancement of expenses from such other corporation, partnership, joint venture,
trust, enterprise or non-profit enterprise. The Corporation shall have the power
to purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of any person who is or was a
director officer, employee or agent of the Corporation, or is or was serving at
the request of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of
another corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust or

                                       6
<PAGE>   7
other enterprise against any liability asserted against and incurred by
such person in any such capacity, or arising out of such person's status as
such.

                  F. Amendment or Repeal. Any repeal or modification of the
foregoing provisions of this Article VIII shall not adversely affect any right
or protection hereunder of any Covered Person in respect of any act or omission
occurring prior to the time of such repeal or modification.

                  G. Other Indemnification and Prepayment of Expenses. This
Article VIII shall not limit the right to the Corporation to the extent and in
the manner permitted by law, to indemnify and to advance expenses to persons
other than Covered Persons when and as authorized by appropriate corporate
action.

                                   ARTICLE IX

                               Amendment of Bylaws

                  In furtherance of and not in limitation of powers conferred by
statute, the Board of Directors of the Corporation is expressly authorized to
adopt, repeal, alter, amend and rescind the bylaws of the Corporation by vote of
66.67% of the Board of Directors.



                                    ARTICLE X

                    Amendment of Certificate of Incorporation

                  The Corporation reserves the right to amend, alter, change or
repeal any provision contained in this Amended and Restated Certificate of
Incorporation, in the manner now or hereafter prescribed by statute and this
Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation, and all rights conferred upon
stockholders herein are granted subject to this reservation. Notwithstanding the
foregoing, the provisions set forth in ARTICLES V, VI, VII, VIII, IX and this
ARTICLE X may not be repealed, altered, amended or rescinded in any respect
unless the same is approved by the affirmative vote of the holders of not less
than 66.67% of the outstanding shares of capital stock of the Corporation
entitled to vote generally in the election of directors (considered for this
purpose as a single class) cast at a meeting of the stockholders called for that
purpose (provided that notice of such proposed repeal, alteration, amendment or
rescission is included in the notice of such meeting).

                                      * * *


                  FOURTH:   That said amendments were duly adopted in accordance
with the provisions of Sections 242 and 245 of the General Corporation Law.

                                       7
<PAGE>   8

                  IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Amended and Restated Certificate of
Incorporation has been signed this ____ day of October, 1999.




                                           ------------------------------------
                                           Gene DeRose, Chief Executive Officer



                                           ------------------------------------
                                           Jean Robinson, Secretary

                                       8

<PAGE>   1
                                                                Exhibit 4.1

                                    JUPITER
                                 --------------
                                 COMMUNICATIONS
                                 --------------
                            ONLINE INTELLIGENCE LOGO
                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
              INCORPORATED UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE

                                                             SEE REVERSE FOR
                                                           CERTAIN DEFINITIONS

                                                           CUSIP 482050 10 1

THIS CERTIFIED THAT








is the owner of


      FULLY PAID AND NON-ASSESSABLE SHARES OF THE PAR VALUE OF $0.001 EACH
                             OF THE COMMON STOCK OF
=========================JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.==========================

transferable on the books of the Corporation by the holder hereof in person or
by duly authorized attorney upon surrender of this certificate properly
endorsed.
     This certificate is not valid unless countersigned and registered by the
Transfer Agent and Registrant.
     WITNESS the facsimile seal of the Corporation and the facsimile signatures
of its duly authorized officers.

Dated:


                          JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
                                 CORPORATE SEAL
                                      1999
                                    DELAWARE

/s/ Gene DeRose                         /s/  Jean K. Robinson
- --------------------------------         --------------------------------------
    Chief Executive Officer              Chief Financial Officer and Secretary




COUNTERSIGNED AND REGISTERED
  AMERICAN STOCK TRANSFER & TRUST COMPANY
        (NEW YORK, N.Y.)
                                               TRANSFER AGENT
                                                AND REGISTRAR

BY

                                           AUTHORIZED OFFICER
<PAGE>   2
     The following abbreviations, when used in the inscription on the face of
this certificate, shall be construed as though they were written out in full
according to applicable laws or regulations:

     TEN COM - as tenants in common
     TEN ENT - as tenants by the entireties
     IT TEN  - as joint tenants with right of
               survivorship and not as tenants
               in common

     UNIF GIFT MIN ACT - ____________Custodian____________
                            (Cust)               (Minor)
                         under Uniform Gifts to Minors
                         Act____________
                              (State)

     Additional abbreviations may also be used though not in the
above list.



For value received,____________hereby sell, assign and transfer unto

PLEASE INSERT SOCIAL SECURITY OR OTHER
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER OF ASSIGNEE
_________________________________
_________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________
(PLEASE PRINT OR TYPEWRITE NAME AND ADDRESS, INCLUDING ZIP CODE OF ASSIGNEE)
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________shares
of the capital stock represented, by the within Certificate, and do hereby
irrevocably constitute and appoint
____________________________________________________________________. Attorney
to transfer the said stock on the books of the within named Corporation with
full power of substitution in the premises.

Dated__________________________________________



               ________________________________________________________________
       NOTICE: THE SIGNATURE(S) TO THIS ASSIGNMENT MUST CORRESPOND WITH THE
               NAME(S) AS WRITTEN UPON THE FACE OF THE CERTIFICATE IN EVERY
               PARTICULAR WITHOUT ALTERATION OR ENLARGEMENT OR ANY CHANGE
               WHATEVER.



Signature(s) Guaranteed:


_______________________________________________________________________________
THE SIGNATURE(S) SHOULD BE GUARANTEED BY AN ELIGIBLE GUARANTOR INSTITUTION
(BANKS, STOCKBROKERS, SAVINGS AND LOAN ASSOCIATIONS AND CREDIT UNIONS WITH
MEMBERSHIP IN AN APPROVED SIGNATURE GUARANTEE MEDALLION PROGRAM), PURSUANT TO
S.E.C RULE 17Ad-15.

<PAGE>   1
                                                                   Exhibit 10.4


                           JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
                             1999 STOCK INCENTIVE PLAN



                                  ARTICLE ONE

                               GENERAL PROVISIONS

     I.   PURPOSE OF THE PLAN

          This 1999 Stock Incentive Plan is intended to promote the interests of
Jupiter Communications, Inc., a Delaware corporation, by providing eligible
persons with the opportunity to acquire a proprietary interest, or otherwise
increase their proprietary interest, in the Corporation as an incentive for them
to remain in the service of the Corporation.

          Capitalized terms shall have the meanings assigned to such terms in
the attached Appendix.

     II.  STRUCTURE OF THE PLAN

          A.   The Plan shall be divided into five separate equity programs:

                  (i) the Discretionary Option Grant Program under which
     eligible persons may, at the discretion of the Plan Administrator, be
     granted options to purchase shares of Common Stock,

                  (ii) the Salary Investment Option Grant Program under which
     eligible employees may elect to have a portion of their base salary
     invested each year in special options,

                  (iii) the Stock Issuance Program under which eligible persons
     may, at the discretion of the Plan Administrator, be issued shares of
     Common Stock directly, either through the immediate purchase of such shares
     or as a bonus for services rendered the Corporation (or any Parent or
     Subsidiary),

                  (iv) the Automatic Option Grant Program under which eligible
     non-employee Board members shall automatically receive options at periodic
     intervals to purchase shares of Common Stock; and

                  (v) the Director Fee Option Grant Program under which
     non-employee Board members may elect to have all or any portion of their
     annual retainer fee otherwise payable in cash applied to a special option
     grant.

          B.   The provisions of Articles One and Seven shall apply to all
equity programs under the Plan and shall govern the interests of all persons
under the Plan.
<PAGE>   2
     III. ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN

          A.   Prior to the Section 12 Registration Date, the Discretionary
Option Grant and Stock Issuance Programs shall be administered by the Board
unless otherwise determined by the Board. Beginning with the Section 12
Registration Date, the following provisions shall govern the administration of
the Plan:

                  (i) The Board shall have the authority to administer the
     Discretionary Option Grant and Stock Issuance Programs with respect to
     Section 16 Insiders but may delegate such authority in whole or in part to
     the Primary Committee.

                  (ii) Administration of the Discretionary Option Grant and
     Stock Issuance Programs with respect to all other persons eligible to
     participate in those programs may, at the Board's discretion, be vested in
     the Primary Committee or a Secondary Committee, or the Board may retain the
     power to administer those programs with respect to all such persons.

                  (iii) Administration of the Automatic Option Grant Program
     shall be self-executing in accordance with the terms of that program.

          B.   Each Plan Administrator shall, within the scope of its
administrative jurisdiction under the Plan, have full power and authority
subject to the provisions of the Plan:

                  (i) to establish such rules as it may deem appropriate for
     proper administration of the Plan, to make all factual determinations, to
     construe and interpret the provisions of the Plan and the awards thereunder
     and to resolve any and all ambiguities thereunder;

                  (ii) to determine, with respect to awards made under the
     Discretionary Option Grant and Stock Issuance Programs, which eligible
     persons are to receive such awards, the time or times when such awards are
     to be made, the number of shares to be covered by each such award, the
     vesting schedule (if any) applicable to the award, the status of a granted
     option as either an Incentive Option or a Non-Statutory Option and the
     maximum term for which the option is to remain outstanding;

                  (iii) to amend, modify or cancel any outstanding award with
     the consent of the holder or accelerate the vesting of such award; and

                  (iv) to take such other discretionary actions as permitted
     pursuant to the terms of the applicable program.

Decisions of each Plan Administrator within the scope of its administrative
functions under the Plan shall be final and binding on all parties.

          C.   Members of the Primary Committee or any Secondary Committee shall
serve for such period of time as the Board may determine and may be removed by
the Board at any time. The Board may also at any time terminate the functions of
any Secondary Committee and reassume all powers and authority previously
delegated to such committee.


                                       2
<PAGE>   3
          D.   Service on the Primary Committee or the Secondary Committee shall
constitute service as a Board member, and members of each such committee shall
accordingly be entitled to full indemnification and reimbursement as Board
members for their service on such committee. No member of the Primary Committee
or the Secondary Committee shall be liable for any act or omission made in good
faith with respect to the Plan or any options or stock issuances under the Plan.

     IV.  ELIGIBILITY

          A.   The persons eligible to participate in the Discretionary Option
Grant and Stock Issuance Programs are as follows:

                  (i) Employees,

                  (ii) non-employee members of the Board or the board of
     directors of any Parent or Subsidiary, and

                  (iii) consultants and other independent advisors who provide
     services to the Corporation (or any Parent or Subsidiary).

          B.   Only Employees who are Section 16 Insiders or other highly
compensated individuals shall be eligible to participate in the Salary
Investment Option Grant Program.

          C.   Only non-employee Board members shall be eligible to participate
in the Automatic Option Grant and Director Fee Option Grant Programs.

V.       STOCK SUBJECT TO THE PLAN

          A.   The stock issuable under the Plan shall be shares of authorized
but unissued or reacquired Common Stock, including shares repurchased by the
Corporation on the open market. The maximum number of shares of Common Stock
initially reserved for issuance over the term of the Plan shall not exceed Five
Million (5,000,000) shares.

          B.   No one person participating in the Plan may receive options,
separately exercisable stock appreciation rights and direct stock issuances for
more than Five Hundred Thousand (500,000) shares of Common Stock in the
aggregate per calendar year, beginning with the 1999 calendar year.

          C.   Shares of Common Stock subject to outstanding options shall be
available for subsequent issuance under the Plan to the extent those options
expire, terminate or are cancelled for any reason prior to exercise in full.
Unvested shares issued under the Plan and subsequently repurchased by the
Corporation, at the original exercise or issue price paid per share, pursuant to
the Corporation's repurchase rights under the Plan shall be added back to the
number of shares of Common Stock reserved for issuance under the Plan and shall
accordingly be available for reissuance through one or more subsequent options
or direct stock issuances under the Plan. However, should the exercise price of
an option under the Plan be paid with shares of Common Stock or should shares of
Common Stock otherwise issuable under the Plan be withheld by the Corporation in
satisfaction of the withholding taxes incurred in connection


                                       3
<PAGE>   4
with the exercise of an option or the vesting of a stock issuance under the
Plan, then the number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the
Plan shall be reduced by the gross number of shares for which the option is
exercised or which vest under the stock issuance, and not by the net number of
shares of Common Stock issued to the holder of such option or stock issuance.
Shares of Common Stock underlying one or more stock appreciation rights
exercised under the Plan shall NOT be available for subsequent issuance.

          D.   If any change is made to the Common Stock by reason of any stock
split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of
shares or other change affecting the outstanding Common Stock as a class without
the Corporation's receipt of consideration, appropriate adjustments shall be
made to (i) the maximum number and/or class of securities issuable under the
Plan, (ii) the number and/or class of securities for which any one person may be
granted options, separately exercisable stock appreciation rights and direct
stock issuances under the Plan per calendar year, (iii) the number and/or class
of securities for which grants are subsequently to be made under the Automatic
Option Grant Program to new and continuing non-employee Board members and (iv)
the number and/or class of securities and the exercise price per share in effect
under each outstanding option under the Plan. Such adjustments to the
outstanding options are to be effected in a manner which shall preclude the
enlargement or dilution of rights and benefits under such options. The
adjustments determined by the Plan Administrator shall be final, binding and
conclusive.


                                       4
<PAGE>   5
                                  ARTICLE TWO

                       DISCRETIONARY OPTION GRANT PROGRAM

     I.   OPTION TERMS

          Each option shall be evidenced by one or more documents in the form
approved by the Plan Administrator; provided, however, that each such document
shall comply with the terms specified below. Each document evidencing an
Incentive Option shall, in addition, be subject to the provisions of the Plan
applicable to such options.

          A.   EXERCISE PRICE.

               1.   The exercise price per share shall be fixed by the Plan
Administrator at the time of the option grant and may be less than, equal to or
greater than the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on the option grant
date.

               2.   The exercise price shall become immediately due upon
exercise of the option and shall, subject to the provisions of Section II of
Article Seven and the documents evidencing the option, be payable in one or more
of the following forms:

                    (i)  cash or check made payable to the Corporation,

                    (ii) shares of Common Stock held for the requisite period
     necessary to avoid a charge to the Corporation's earnings for financial
     reporting purposes and valued at Fair Market Value on the Exercise Date, or

                    (iii) to the extent the option is exercised for vested
     shares, through a special sale and remittance procedure pursuant to which
     the Optionee shall concurrently provide irrevocable instructions to (a) a
     Corporation-approved brokerage firm to effect the immediate sale of the
     purchased shares and remit to the Corporation, out of the sale proceeds
     available on the settlement date, sufficient funds to cover the aggregate
     exercise price payable for the purchased shares plus all applicable
     Federal, state and local income and employment taxes required to be
     withheld by the Corporation by reason of such exercise and (b) the
     Corporation to deliver the certificates for the purchased shares directly
     to such brokerage firm in order to complete the sale.

          Except to the extent such sale and remittance procedure is utilized,
payment of the exercise price for the purchased shares must be made on the
Exercise Date.

          B.   EXERCISE AND TERM OF OPTIONS. Each option shall be exercisable at
such time or times, during such period and for such number of shares as shall be
determined by the Plan Administrator and set forth in the documents evidencing
the option. However, no option shall have a term in excess of ten (10) years
measured from the option grant date.


                                       5
<PAGE>   6
          C.   CESSATION OF SERVICE.

               1.   The following provisions shall govern the exercise of any
options outstanding at the time of the Optionee's cessation of Service or death:

                    (i) Any option outstanding at the time of the Optionee's
     cessation of Service for any reason shall remain exercisable for such
     period of time thereafter as shall be determined by the Plan Administrator
     and set forth in the documents evidencing the option, but no such option
     shall be exercisable after the expiration of the option term.

                    (ii) Any option exercisable in whole or in part by the
     Optionee at the time of death may be subsequently exercised by his or her
     Beneficiary.

                    (iii) During the applicable post-Service exercise period,
     the option may not be exercised in the aggregate for more than the number
     of vested shares for which the option is exercisable on the date of the
     Optionee's cessation of Service. Upon the expiration of the applicable
     exercise period or (if earlier) upon the expiration of the option term, the
     option shall terminate and cease to be outstanding for any vested shares
     for which the option has not been exercised. However, the option shall,
     immediately upon the Optionee's cessation of Service, terminate and cease
     to be outstanding to the extent the option is not otherwise at that time
     exercisable for vested shares.

                    (iv) Should the Optionee's Service be terminated for
     Misconduct or should the Optionee engage in Misconduct while his or her
     options are outstanding, then all such options shall terminate immediately
     and cease to be outstanding.

               2.   The Plan Administrator shall have complete discretion,
exercisable either at the time an option is granted or at any time while the
option remains outstanding:

                    (i) to extend the period of time for which the option is to
     remain exercisable following the Optionee's cessation of Service to such
     period of time as the Plan Administrator shall deem appropriate, but in no
     event beyond the expiration of the option term, and/or

                    (ii) to permit the option to be exercised, during the
     applicable post-Service exercise period, for one or more additional
     installments in which the Optionee would have vested had the Optionee
     continued in Service.

          D.   STOCKHOLDER RIGHTS. The holder of an option shall have no
stockholder rights with respect to the shares subject to the option until such
person shall have exercised the option, paid the exercise price and become a
holder of record of the purchased shares.

          E.   REPURCHASE RIGHTS. The Plan Administrator shall have the
discretion to grant options which are exercisable for unvested shares of Common
Stock. Should the Optionee cease Service while holding such unvested shares, the
Corporation shall have the right to


                                       6
<PAGE>   7
repurchase, at the exercise price paid per share, any or all of those unvested
shares. The terms upon which such repurchase right shall be exercisable
(including the period and procedure for exercise and the appropriate vesting
schedule for the purchased shares) shall be established by the Plan
Administrator and set forth in the document evidencing such repurchase right.

          F.   FIRST REFUSAL RIGHTS. Until the Section 12 Registration Date, the
Corporation shall have the right of first refusal with respect to any proposed
disposition by the Participant (or any successor in interest) of any shares of
Common Stock issued under the Plan. Such right of first refusal shall be
exercisable in accordance with the terms established by the Plan Administrator
and set forth in the document evidencing such right.

          G.   LIMITED TRANSFERABILITY OF OPTIONS. During the lifetime of the
Optionee, Incentive Options shall be exercisable only by the Optionee and shall
not be assignable or transferable other than by will or by the laws of descent
and distribution following the Optionee's death. Non-Statutory Options shall be
subject to the same restrictions, except that a Non-Statutory Option may, to the
extent permitted by the Plan Administrator, be assigned in whole or in part
during the Optionee's lifetime (i) as a gift to one or more members of the
Optionee's immediate family, to a trust in which Optionee and/or one or more
such family members hold more than fifty percent (50%) of the beneficial
interest or to an entity in which more than fifty percent (50%) of the voting
interests are owned by one or more such family members or (ii) pursuant to a
domestic relations order. The terms applicable to the assigned portion shall be
the same as those in effect for the option immediately prior to such assignment
and shall be set forth in such documents issued to the assignee as the Plan
Administrator may deem appropriate.

     II.  INCENTIVE OPTIONS

          The terms specified below shall be applicable to all Incentive
Options. Except as modified by the provisions of this Section II, all the
provisions of Articles One, Two and Six shall be applicable to Incentive
Options. Options which are specifically designated as Non-Statutory Options when
issued under the Plan shall not be subject to the terms of this Section II.

          A.   ELIGIBILITY. Incentive Options may only be granted to Employees.

          B.   EXERCISE PRICE. The exercise price per share shall not be less
than one hundred percent (100%) of the Fair Market Value per share of Common
Stock on the option grant date.

          C.   DOLLAR LIMITATION. The aggregate Fair Market Value of the shares
of Common Stock (determined as of the respective date or dates of grant) for
which one or more options granted to any Employee under the Plan (or any other
option plan of the Corporation or any Parent or Subsidiary) may for the first
time become exercisable as Incentive Options during any one calendar year shall
not exceed the sum of One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000). To the extent the
Employee holds two (2) or more such options which become exercisable for the
first time in the same calendar year, the foregoing limitation on the
exercisability of such options as Incentive Options shall be applied on the
basis of the order in which such options are granted.


                                       7
<PAGE>   8
          D.   10% STOCKHOLDER. If any Employee to whom an Incentive Option is
granted is a 10% Stockholder, then the exercise price per share shall not be
less than one hundred ten percent (110%) of the Fair Market Value per share of
Common Stock on the option grant date, and the option term shall not exceed five
(5) years measured from the option grant date.

     III. CHANGE IN CONTROL/HOSTILE TAKE-OVER

          A.   Each option outstanding at the time of a Change in Control but
not otherwise fully-vested shall automatically accelerate so that each such
option shall, immediately prior to the effective date of the Change in Control,
become exercisable for all of the shares of Common Stock at the time subject to
that option and may be exercised for any or all of those shares as fully-vested
shares of Common Stock. However, an outstanding option shall not so accelerate
if and to the extent: (i) such option is, in connection with the Change in
Control, assumed or otherwise continued in full force and effect by the
successor corporation (or parent thereof) pursuant to the terms of the Change in
Control, (ii) such option is replaced with a cash incentive program of the
successor corporation which preserves the spread existing at the time of the
Change in Control on the shares of Common Stock for which the option is not
otherwise at that time exercisable and provides for subsequent payout in
accordance with the same vesting schedule applicable to those option shares or
(iii) the acceleration of such option is subject to other limitations imposed by
the Plan Administrator at the time of the option grant. Each option outstanding
at the time of the Change in Control shall terminate as provided in Section
III.C. of this Article Two.

          B.   All outstanding repurchase rights shall also terminate
automatically, and the shares of Common Stock subject to those terminated rights
shall immediately vest in full, in the event of any Change in Control, except to
the extent: (i) those repurchase rights are assigned to the successor
corporation (or parent thereof) or otherwise continue in full force and effect
pursuant to the terms of the Change in Control or (ii) such accelerated vesting
is precluded by other limitations imposed by the Plan Administrator at the time
the repurchase right is issued.

          C.   Immediately following the consummation of the Change in Control,
all outstanding options shall terminate and cease to be outstanding, except to
the extent assumed by the successor corporation (or parent thereof) or otherwise
expressly continued in full force and effect pursuant to the terms of the Change
in Control.

          D.   Each option which is assumed in connection with a Change in
Control shall be appropriately adjusted, immediately after such Change in
Control, to apply to the number and class of securities which would have been
issuable to the Optionee in consummation of such Change in Control had the
option been exercised immediately prior to such Change in Control. Appropriate
adjustments to reflect such Change in Control shall also be made to (i) the
exercise price payable per share under each outstanding option, provided the
aggregate exercise price payable for such securities shall remain the same, (ii)
the maximum number and/or class of securities available for issuance over the
remaining term of the Plan and (iii) the maximum number and/or class of
securities for which any one person may be granted options, separately
exercisable stock appreciation rights and direct stock issuances under the Plan
per calendar year.


                                       8
<PAGE>   9
          E.   The Plan Administrator may at any time provide that one or more
options will automatically accelerate in connection with a Change in Control,
whether or not those options are assumed or otherwise continued in full force
and effect pursuant to the terms of the Change in Control. Any such option shall
accordingly become exercisable, immediately prior to the effective date of such
Change in Control, for all of the shares of Common Stock at the time subject to
that option and may be exercised for any or all of those shares as fully-vested
shares of Common Stock. In addition, the Plan Administrator may at any time
provide that one or more of the Corporation's repurchase rights shall not be
assignable in connection with such Change in Control and shall terminate upon
the consummation of such Change in Control.

          F.   The Plan Administrator may at any time provide that one or more
options will automatically accelerate upon an Involuntary Termination of the
Optionee's Service within a designated period (not to exceed eighteen (18)
months) following the effective date of any Change in Control in which those
options do not otherwise accelerate. Any options so accelerated shall remain
exercisable for fully-vested shares until the earlier of (i) the expiration of
the option term or (ii) the expiration of the one (1) year period measured from
the effective date of the Involuntary Termination. In addition, the Plan
Administrator may at any time provide that one or more of the Corporation's
repurchase rights shall immediately terminate upon such Involuntary Termination.

          G.   The Plan Administrator may at any time provide that one or more
options will automatically accelerate in connection with a Hostile Take-Over.
Any such option shall become exercisable, immediately prior to the effective
date of such Hostile Take-Over, for all of the shares of Common Stock at the
time subject to that option and may be exercised for any or all of those shares
as fully-vested shares of Common Stock. In addition, the Plan Administrator may
at any time provide that one or more of the Corporation's repurchase rights
shall terminate automatically upon the consummation of such Hostile Take-Over.
Alternatively, the Plan Administrator may condition such automatic acceleration
and termination upon an Involuntary Termination of the Optionee's Service within
a designated period (not to exceed eighteen (18) months) following the effective
date of such Hostile Take-Over. Each option so accelerated shall remain
exercisable for fully-vested shares until the expiration or sooner termination
of the option term.

          H.   The portion of any Incentive Option accelerated in connection
with a Change in Control or Hostile Take Over shall remain exercisable as an
Incentive Option only to the extent the applicable One Hundred Thousand Dollar
($100,000) limitation is not exceeded. To the extent such dollar limitation is
exceeded, the accelerated portion of such option shall be exercisable as a
Non-Statutory Option under the Federal tax laws.

     IV.  STOCK APPRECIATION RIGHTS

          The Plan Administrator may, subject to such conditions as it may
determine, grant to selected Optionees stock appreciation rights which will
allow the holders of those rights to elect between the exercise of the
underlying option for shares of Common Stock and the surrender of that option in
exchange for a distribution from the Corporation in an amount equal to the
excess of (a) the Option Surrender Value of the number of shares for which the
option is surrendered over (b) the aggregate exercise price payable for such
shares. The distribution may


                                       9
<PAGE>   10
be made in shares of Common Stock valued at Fair Market Value on the option
surrender date, in cash, or partly in shares and partly in cash, as the Plan
Administrator shall in its sole discretion deem appropriate.


                                       10
<PAGE>   11
                                 ARTICLE THREE

                     SALARY INVESTMENT OPTION GRANT PROGRAM

     I.   OPTION GRANTS

          The Primary Committee may implement the Salary Investment Option Grant
Program for one or more calendar years beginning after the Underwriting Date and
select the Section 16 Insiders and other highly compensated Employees eligible
to participate in the Salary Investment Option Grant Program for each such
calendar year. Each selected individual who elects to participate in the Salary
Investment Option Grant Program must, prior to the start of each calendar year
of participation, file with the Plan Administrator (or its designate) an
irrevocable authorization directing the Corporation to reduce his or her base
salary for that calendar year by an amount not less than Five Thousand Dollars
($5,000.00) nor more than Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000.00). The Primary
Committee shall have complete discretion to determine whether to approve the
filed authorization in whole or in part. To the extent the Primary Committee
approves the authorization, the individual who filed that authorization shall be
granted an option under the Salary Investment Grant Program on the first trading
day in January for the calendar year for which the salary reduction is to be in
effect.

     II.  OPTION TERMS

          Each option shall be a Non-Statutory Option evidenced by one or more
documents in the form approved by the Plan Administrator; provided, however,
that each such document shall comply with the terms specified below.

          A.   Exercise Price.

               1.   The exercise price per share shall be thirty-three and
one-third percent (33-1/3%) of the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock
on the option grant date.

               2.   The exercise price shall become immediately due upon
exercise of the option and shall be payable in one or more of the alternative
forms authorized under the Discretionary Option Grant Program. Except to the
extent the sale and remittance procedure specified thereunder is utilized,
payment of the exercise price for the purchased shares must be made on the
Exercise Date.

          B.   NUMBER OF OPTION SHARES. The number of shares of Common Stock
subject to the option shall be determined pursuant to the following formula
(rounded down to the nearest whole number):

               X = A / (B x 66-2/3%), where

               X is the number of option shares,

               A is the dollar amount of the approved reduction in the
          Optionee's base salary for the calendar year, and


                                       11
<PAGE>   12
               B is the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on the
          option grant date.

          C.   EXERCISE AND TERM OF OPTIONS. The option shall become exercisable
in a series of twelve (12) successive equal monthly installments upon the
Optionee's completion of each calendar month of Service in the calendar year for
which the salary reduction is in effect. Each option shall have a maximum term
of ten (10) years measured from the option grant date.

          D.   CESSATION OF SERVICE. Each option outstanding at the time of the
Optionee's cessation of Service shall remain exercisable, for any or all of the
shares for which the option is exercisable at the time of such cessation of
Service, until the earlier of (i) the expiration of the option term or (ii) the
expiration of the three (3)-year period following the Optionee's cessation of
Service. To the extent the option is held by the Optionee at the time of his or
her death, the option may be exercised by his or her Beneficiary. However, the
option shall, immediately upon the Optionee's cessation of Service, terminate
and cease to remain outstanding with respect to any and all shares of Common
Stock for which the option is not otherwise at that time exercisable.

     III. CHANGE IN CONTROL/HOSTILE TAKE-OVER

          A.   In the event of any Change in Control or Hostile Take-Over while
the Optionee remains in Service, each outstanding option shall automatically
accelerate so that each such option shall, immediately prior to the effective
date of the Change in Control or Hostile Take-Over, become fully exercisable
with respect to the total number of shares of Common Stock at the time subject
to such option and may be exercised for any or all of those shares as
fully-vested shares of Common Stock. Each such option accelerated in connection
with a Change in Control shall terminate upon the Change in Control, except to
the extent assumed by the successor corporation (or parent thereof) or otherwise
continued in full force and effect pursuant to the terms of the Change in
Control. Each such option accelerated in connection with a Hostile Take-Over
shall remain exercisable until the expiration or sooner termination of the
option term.

          B.   Each option which is assumed in connection with a Change in
Control shall be appropriately adjusted to apply to the number and class of
securities which would have been issuable to the Optionee in consummation of
such Change in Control had the option been exercised immediately prior to such
Change in Control. Appropriate adjustments shall also be made to the exercise
price payable per share under each outstanding option, provided the aggregate
exercise price payable for such securities shall remain the same.

          C.   Upon the occurrence of a Hostile Take-Over, the Optionee shall
have a thirty (30)-day period in which to surrender to the Corporation each of
his or her outstanding options. The Optionee shall in return be entitled to a
cash distribution from the Corporation in an amount equal to the excess of (i)
the Option Surrender Value of the shares of Common Stock at the time subject to
each surrendered option (whether or not the Optionee is otherwise at the time
vested in those shares) over (ii) the aggregate exercise price payable for such
shares. Such cash distribution shall be paid within five (5) days following the
surrender of the option to the Corporation.


                                       12
<PAGE>   13
     IV.  REMAINING TERMS

          The remaining terms of each option granted under the Salary Investment
Option Grant Program shall be the same as the terms in effect for options made
under the Discretionary Option Grant Program.


                                       13
<PAGE>   14
                                  ARTICLE FOUR

                             STOCK ISSUANCE PROGRAM

     I.   STOCK ISSUANCE TERMS

          Shares of Common Stock may be issued under the Stock Issuance Program
through direct and immediate issuances without any intervening options. Shares
of Common Stock may also be issued under the Stock Issuance Program pursuant to
share right awards which entitle the recipients to receive those shares upon the
attainment of designated performance goals or Service requirements. Each such
award shall be evidenced by one or more documents which comply with the terms
specified below.

          A.   PURCHASE PRICE.

               1.   The purchase price per share of Common Stock subject to
direct issuance shall be fixed by the Plan Administrator and may be less than,
equal to greater than the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on the
issue date.

               2.   Subject to the provisions of Section II of Article Seven,
shares of Common Stock may be issued under the Stock Issuance Program for any of
the following items of consideration which the Plan Administrator may deem
appropriate in each individual instance:

                    (i)  cash or check made payable to the Corporation, or

                    (ii) past services rendered to the Corporation (or any
     Parent or Subsidiary).

          B.   VESTING/ISSUANCE PROVISIONS.

               1.   The Plan Administrator may issue shares of Common Stock
which are fully and immediately vested upon issuance or which are to vest in one
or more installments over the Participant's period of Service or upon attainment
of specified performance objectives. Alternatively, the Plan Administrator may
issue share right awards which shall entitle the recipient to receive a
specified number of vested shares of Common Stock upon the attainment of one or
more performance goals or Service requirements established by the Plan
Administrator.

               2.   Any new, substituted or additional securities or other
property (including money paid other than as a regular cash dividend) which the
Participant may have the right to receive with respect to his or her unvested
shares of Common Stock by reason of any stock dividend, stock split,
recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange of shares or other change
affecting the outstanding Common Stock as a class without the Corporation's
receipt of consideration shall be issued subject to (i) the same vesting
requirements applicable to the Participant's unvested shares of Common Stock and
(ii) such escrow arrangements as the Plan Administrator shall deem appropriate.


                                       14
<PAGE>   15
               3.   The Participant shall have full stockholder rights with
respect to the issued shares of Common Stock, whether or not the Participant's
interest in those shares is vested. Accordingly, the Participant shall have the
right to vote such shares and to receive any regular cash dividends paid on such
shares.

               4.   Should the Participant cease to remain in Service while
holding one or more unvested shares of Common Stock, or should the performance
objectives not be attained with respect to one or more such unvested shares of
Common Stock, then those shares shall be immediately surrendered to the
Corporation for cancellation, and the Participant shall have no further
stockholder rights with respect to those shares. To the extent the surrendered
shares were previously issued to the Participant for consideration paid in cash
or cash equivalent (including the Participant's purchase-money indebtedness),
the Corporation shall repay to the Participant the cash consideration paid for
the surrendered shares and shall cancel the unpaid principal balance of any
outstanding purchase-money note of the Participant attributable to the
surrendered shares.

               5.   The Plan Administrator may waive the surrender and
cancellation of one or more unvested shares of Common Stock (or other assets
attributable thereto) which would otherwise occur upon the cessation of the
Participant's Service or the non-attainment of the performance objectives
applicable to those shares. Such waiver shall result in the immediate vesting of
the Participant's interest in the shares of Common Stock as to which the waiver
applies. Such waiver may be effected at any time, whether before or after the
Participant's cessation of Service or the attainment or non-attainment of the
applicable performance objectives.

               6.   Outstanding share right awards shall automatically
terminate, and no shares of Common Stock shall actually be issued in
satisfaction of those awards, if the performance goals or Service requirements
established for such awards are not attained. The Plan Administrator, however,
shall have the authority to issue shares of Common Stock in satisfaction of one
or more outstanding share right awards as to which the designated performance
goals or Service requirements are not attained.

     II.  CHANGE IN CONTROL/HOSTILE TAKE-OVER

          A.   All of the Corporation's outstanding repurchase rights shall
terminate automatically, and all the shares of Common Stock subject to those
terminated rights shall immediately vest in full, in the event of any Change in
Control, except to the extent (i) those repurchase rights are assigned to the
successor corporation (or parent thereof) or otherwise continue in full force
and effect pursuant to the terms of the Change in Control or (ii) such
accelerated vesting is precluded by other limitations imposed by the Plan
Administrator at the time the repurchase right is issued.

          B.   The Plan Administrator may at any time provide for the automatic
termination of one or more of those outstanding repurchase rights and the
immediate vesting of the shares of Common Stock subject to those terminated
rights upon (i) a Change in Control or Hostile Take-Over or (ii) an Involuntary
Termination of the Participant's Service within a designated period (not to
exceed eighteen (18) months) following the effective date of any


                                       15
<PAGE>   16
Change in Control or Hostile Take-Over in which those repurchase rights are
assigned to the successor corporation (or parent thereof) or otherwise continue
in full force and effect.

     III. SHARE ESCROW/LEGENDS

          Unvested shares may, in the Plan Administrator's discretion, be held
in escrow by the Corporation until the Participant's interest in such shares
vests or may be issued directly to the Participant with restrictive legends on
the certificates evidencing those unvested shares.


                                       16
<PAGE>   17
                                  ARTICLE FIVE

                         AUTOMATIC OPTION GRANT PROGRAM

     I.   OPTION TERMS

          A.   GRANT DATES. Options shall be made on the dates specified below:

               1.   Each individual who is first elected or appointed as a
non-employee Board member at any time after the Plan Effective Date and is
serving as a non-employee Board member on the Underwriting Date, shall
automatically be granted, on the Underwriting Date, a Non-Statutary Option to
purchase Fifty Thousand (50,000) shares of Common Stock, provided that
individual has not previously been in the employ of the Corporation (or any
Parent or Subsidiary).

               2.   Each individual who is first elected or appointed as a
non-employee Board member at any time after the Underwriting Date shall
automatically be granted, on the date of such initial election or appointment, a
Non-Statutory Option to purchase Fifty Thousand (50,000) shares of Common Stock,
provided that individual has not previously been in the employ of the
Corporation (or any Parent or Subsidiary).

               3.   On the date of each Annual Stockholders Meeting beginning
with the 2001 Annual Stockholder Meeting, each individual who is to continue to
serve as a non-employee Board member shall automatically be granted a
Non-Statutory Option to purchase Five Thousand (5,000) shares of Common Stock.

          B.   EXERCISE PRICE.

               1.   The exercise price per share shall be equal to one hundred
percent (100%) of the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on the option
grant date.

               2.   The exercise price shall be payable in one or more of the
alternative forms authorized under the Discretionary Option Grant Program.
Except to the extent the sale and remittance procedure specified thereunder is
utilized, payment of the exercise price for the purchased shares must be made on
the Exercise Date.

          C.   OPTION TERM. Each option shall have a term of ten (10) years
measured from the option grant date.

          D.   EXERCISE AND VESTING OF OPTIONS. Each option shall be immediately
exercisable for any or all of the option shares. However, any shares purchased
under the option shall be subject to repurchase by the Corporation, at the
exercise price paid per share, upon the Optionee's cessation of Board service
prior to vesting in those shares. Each 50,000-share option shall vest, and the
Corporation's repurchase right shall lapse, in a series of four (4) successive
equal annual installments over the Optionee's period of continued service as a
Board member, with the first such installment to vest upon the Optionee's
completion of one (1) year of Board service measured from the option grant date.
Each annual 5,000-share option shall vest upon the Optionee's completion of one
(1) year of service as a Board Member measured from the option grant.

          E.   CESSATION OF BOARD SERVICE. The following provisions shall govern
the exercise of any options outstanding at the time of the Optionee's cessation
of Board service:


                                       17
<PAGE>   18
                    (i)  Any option outstanding at the time of the Optionee's
     cessation of Board service for any reason shall remain exercisable for a
     twelve (12)-month period following the date of such cessation of Board
     service, but in no event shall such option be exercisable after the
     expiration of the option term.

                    (ii) Any option exercisable in whole or in part by the
     Optionee at the time of death may be subsequently exercised by his or her
     Beneficiary.

                    (iii) Following the Optionee's cessation of Board service,
     the option may not be exercised in the aggregate for more than the number
     of shares for which the option was exercisable on the date of such
     cessation of Board service. Upon the expiration of the applicable exercise
     period or (if earlier) upon the expiration of the option term, the option
     shall terminate and cease to be outstanding for any vested shares for which
     the option has not been exercised. However, the option shall, immediately
     upon the Optionee's cessation of Board service, terminate and cease to be
     outstanding for any and all shares for which the option is not otherwise at
     that time exercisable.

                    (iv) However, should the Optionee cease to serve as a Board
     member by reason of death or Permanent Disability, then all shares at the
     time subject to the option shall immediately vest so that such option may,
     during the twelve (12)-month exercise period following such cessation of
     Board service, be exercised for all or any portion of those shares as
     fully-vested shares of Common Stock.

     II.  CHANGE IN CONTROL/HOSTILE TAKE-OVER

          A.   In the event of any Change in Control or Hostile Take-Over, the
shares of Common Stock at the time subject to each outstanding option but not
otherwise vested shall automatically vest in full so that each such option may,
immediately prior to the effective date of such Change in Control or Hostile
Take-Over, became fully exercisable for all of the shares of Common Stock at the
time subject to such option and maybe exercised for all or any of those shares
as fully-vested shares of Common Stock. Each such option accelerated in
connection with a Change in Control shall terminate upon the Change in Control,
except to the extent assumed by the successor corporation (or parent thereof) or
otherwise continued in full force and effect pursuant to the terms of the Change
in Control. Each such option accelerated in connection with a Hostile Take-Over
shall remain exercisable until the expiration or sooner termination of the
option term.

          B.   All outstanding repurchase rights shall automatically terminate
and the shares of Common Stock subject to those terminated rights shall
immediately vest in full, in the event of any Change in Control or Hostile
Take-Over.

          C.   Upon the occurrence of a Hostile Take-Over, the Optionee shall
have a thirty (30)-day period in which to surrender to the Corporation each of
his or her outstanding options. The Optionee shall in return be entitled to a
cash distribution from the Corporation in an amount equal to the excess of (i)
the Option Surrender Value of the shares of Common Stock at the time subject to
each surrendered option (whether or not the option is otherwise at the time
exercisable for those shares) over (ii) the aggregate exercise price payable for
such shares. Such


                                       18
<PAGE>   19
cash distribution shall be paid within five (5) days following the surrender of
the option to the Corporation.

          D.   Each option which is assumed in connection with a Change in
Control shall be appropriately adjusted to apply to the number and class of
securities which would have been issuable to the Optionee in consummation of
such Change in Control had the option been exercised immediately prior to such
Change in Control. Appropriate adjustments shall also be made to the exercise
price payable per share under each outstanding option, provided the aggregate
exercise price payable for such securities shall remain the same.

     III. REMAINING TERMS

          The remaining terms of each option granted under the Automatic Option
Grant Program shall be the same as the terms in effect for options made under
the Discretionary Option Grant Program.


                                       19
<PAGE>   20
                                   ARTICLE SIX

                        DIRECTOR FEE OPTION GRANT PROGRAM

     I.   OPTION GRANTS

          The Board may implement the Director Fee Option Grant Program as of
the first day of any calendar year beginning after the Underwriting Date. Upon
such implementation of the Program, each non-employee Board member may elect to
apply all or any portion of the annual retainer fee otherwise payable in cash
for his or her service on the Board to the acquisition of a special option grant
under this Director Fee Option Grant Program. Such election must be filed with
the Corporation's Chief Financial Officer prior to the first day of the calendar
year for which the election is to be in effect. Each non-employee Board member
who files such a timely election with respect to the annul retainer fee shall
automatically be granted an option under this Director Fee Option Grant Program
on the first trading day in January in the calendar year for which that fee
would otherwise be payable.

     II.  OPTION TERMS

          Each option shall be a Non-Statutory Option governed by the terms and
conditions specified below.

          A.   EXERCISE PRICE.

               1.   The exercise price per share shall be thirty-three and
one-third percent (33-1/3%) of the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock
on the option grant date.

               2.   The exercise price shall become immediately due upon
exercise of the option and shall be payable in one or more of the alternative
forms authorized under the Discretionary Option Grant Program. Except to the
extent the sale and remittance procedure specified thereunder is utilized,
payment of the exercise price for the purchased shares must be made on the
Exercise Date.

          B.   NUMBER OF OPTION SHARES. The number of shares of Common Stock
subject to the option shall be determined pursuant to the following formula
(rounded down to the nearest whole number):

          X = A / (B x 66-2/3%), where

          X is the number of option shares,

          A is the portion of the annual retainer fee subject to the
          non-employee Board member's election, and

          B is the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on the option
          grant date.

          C.   EXERCISE AND TERM OF OPTIONS. The option shall become exercisable
in a series of twelve (12) successive equal monthly installments upon the
Optionee's completion of


                                       20
<PAGE>   21
each month of Board service during the calendar year in which the option is
granted. Each option shall have a maximum term of ten (10) years measured from
the option grant date.

          D.   CESSATION OF BOARD SERVICE. Should the Optionee cease Board
service for any reason (other than death or Permanent Disability) while holding
one or more options, then each such option shall remain exercisable, for any or
all of the shares for which the option is exercisable at the time of such
cessation of Board service, until the earlier of (i) the expiration of the ten
(10)-year option term or (ii) the expiration of the three (3)-year period
measured from the date of such cessation of Board service. However, each option
held by the Optionee at the time of such cessation of Board service shall
immediately terminate and cease to remain outstanding with respect to any and
all shares of Common Stock for which the option is not otherwise at that time
exercisable.

          E.   DEATH OR PERMANENT DISABILITY. Should the Optionee's service as a
Board member cease by reason of death or Permanent Disability, then each option
held by such Optionee shall immediately become exercisable for all the shares of
Common Stock at the time subject to that option, and the option may be exercised
for any or all of those shares as fully-vested shares until the earlier of (i)
the expiration of the ten (10)-year option term or (ii) the expiration of the
three (3)-year period measured from the date of such cessation of Board service.

          Should the Optionee die after cessation of Board service but while
holding one or more options, then each such option may be exercised, for any or
all of the shares for which the option is exercisable at the time of the
Optionee's cessation of Board service (less any shares subsequently purchased by
Optionee prior to death), by the Optionee's Beneficiary. Such right of exercise
shall lapse, and the option shall terminate, upon the earlier of (i) the
expiration of the ten (10)-year option term or (ii) the three (3)-year period
measured from the date of the Optionee's cessation of Board service.

     III. CHANGE IN CONTROL/HOSTILE TAKE-OVER

          A.   In the event of any Change in Control or Hostile Take-Over while
the Optionee remains in Board service, each outstanding option held by such
Optionee shall automatically accelerate so that each such option shall,
immediately prior to the effective date of the Change in Control or Hostile
Take-Over, become fully exercisable with respect to the total number of shares
of Common Stock at the time subject to such option and may be exercised for any
or all of those shares as fully-vested shares of Common Stock. Each such option
accelerated in connection with a Change in Control shall terminate upon the
Change in Control, except to the extent assumed by the successor corporation (or
parent thereof) or otherwise expressly continued in full force and effect
pursuant to the terms of the Change in Control. Each such option accelerated in
connection with a Hostile Take-Over shall remain exercisable until the
expiration or sooner termination of the option term.

          B.   Upon the occurrence of a Hostile Take-Over, the Optionee shall
have a thirty (30)-day period in which to surrender to the Corporation each of
his or her outstanding options. The Optionee shall in return be entitled to a
cash distribution from the Corporation in an amount equal to the excess of (i)
the Option Surrender Value of the shares of Common Stock at the time subject to
each surrendered option (whether or not the Optionee is otherwise at the time


                                       21
<PAGE>   22
vested in those shares) over (ii) the aggregate exercise price payable for such
shares. Such cash distribution shall be paid within five (5) days following the
surrender of the option to the Corporation.

     IV.  REMAINING TERMS

          The remaining terms of each option granted under this Director Fee
Option Grant Program shall be the same as the terms in effect for options made
under the Discretionary Option Grant Program.


                                       22
<PAGE>   23
                                  ARTICLE SEVEN

                                  MISCELLANEOUS

     I.   NO IMPAIRMENT OF AUTHORITY

          Outstanding awards shall in no way affect the right of the Corporation
to adjust, reclassify, reorganize or otherwise change its capital or business
structure or to merge, consolidate, dissolve, liquidate or sell or transfer all
or any part of its business or assets.

     II.  FINANCING

          The Plan Administrator may permit any Optionee or Participant to pay
the option exercise price under the Discretionary Option Grant Program or the
purchase price of shares issued under the Stock Issuance Program by delivering a
full-recourse, interest bearing promissory note payable in one or more
installments. The terms of any such promissory note (including the interest rate
and the terms of repayment) shall be established by the Plan Administrator in
its sole discretion. In no event may the maximum credit available to the
Optionee or Participant exceed the sum of (i) the aggregate option exercise
price or purchase price payable for the purchased shares plus (ii) any Federal,
state and local income and employment tax liability incurred by the Optionee or
the Participant in connection with the option exercise or share purchase.

     III. TAX WITHHOLDING

          A.   The Corporation's obligation to deliver shares of Common Stock
upon the exercise of options or the issuance or vesting of such shares under the
Plan shall be subject to the satisfaction of all applicable Federal, state and
local income and employment tax withholding requirements.

          B.   The Plan Administrator may, in its discretion, provide any or all
holders of Non-Statutory Options or unvested shares of Common Stock under the
Plan with the right to use shares of Common Stock in satisfaction of all or part
of the Withholding Taxes incurred by such holders in connection with the
exercise of their options or the vesting of their shares. Such right may be
provided to any such holder in either or both of the following formats:

               Stock Withholding: The election to have the Corporation withhold,
from the shares of Common Stock otherwise issuable upon the exercise of such
Non-Statutory Option or the vesting of such shares, a portion of those shares
with an aggregate Fair Market Value equal to the percentage of the Withholding
Taxes (not to exceed one hundred percent (100%)) designated by the holder.

               Stock Delivery: The election to deliver to the Corporation, at
the time the Non-Statutory Option is exercised or the shares vest, one or more
shares of Common Stock previously acquired by such holder (other than in
connection with the option exercise or share vesting triggering the Withholding
Taxes) with an aggregate Fair Market Value equal to the percentage of the Taxes
(not to exceed one hundred percent (100%)) designated by the holder.


                                       23
<PAGE>   24
     IV.  EFFECTIVE DATE AND TERM OF THE PLAN

          A.   The Plan shall become effective immediately upon the Plan
Effective Date. However, the Salary Investment Option Grant and Director Fee
Option Grant Programs shall not be implemented until such time as the Primary
Committee or the Board may deem appropriate. Options may be granted under the
Discretionary Option Grant Program at any time on or after the Plan Effective
Date. However, no options granted under the Plan may be exercised, and no shares
shall be issued under the Plan, until the Plan is approved by the Corporation's
stockholders. If such stockholder approval is not obtained within twelve (12)
months after the Plan Effective Date, then all options previously granted under
this Plan shall terminate and cease to be outstanding, and no further options
shall be granted and no shares shall be issued under the Plan.

          B.   The Plan shall terminate upon the earliest of (i) September 16,
2009, (ii) the date on which all shares available for issuance under the Plan
shall have been issued as fully-vested shares or (iii) the termination of all
outstanding options in connection with a Change in Control. Upon such plan
termination, all outstanding options and unvested stock issuances shall
thereafter continue to have force and effect in accordance with the provisions
of the documents evidencing such grants or issuances.

     V.   AMENDMENT OF THE PLAN

          A.   The Board shall have complete and exclusive power and authority
to amend or modify the Plan in any or all respects. However, no such amendment
or modification shall adversely affect the rights and obligations with respect
to stock options or unvested stock issuances at the time outstanding under the
Plan unless the Optionee or the Participant consents to such amendment or
modification. In addition, certain amendments may require stockholder approval
pursuant to applicable laws or regulations.

          B.   Options to purchase shares of Common Stock may be granted under
the Discretionary Option Grant and Salary Investment Option Grant Programs and
shares of Common Stock may be issued under the Stock Issuance Program that are
in each instance in excess of the number of shares then available for issuance
under the Plan, provided any excess shares actually issued under those programs
shall be held in escrow until there is obtained stockholder approval of an
amendment sufficiently increasing the number of shares of Common Stock available
for issuance under the Plan. If such stockholder approval is not obtained within
twelve (12) months after the date the first such excess issuances are made, then
(i) any unexercised options granted on the basis of such excess shares shall
terminate and cease to be outstanding and (ii) the Corporation shall promptly
refund to the Optionees and the Participants the exercise or purchase price paid
for any excess shares issued under the Plan and held in escrow, together with
interest (at the applicable Short Term Federal Rate) for the period the shares
were held in escrow, and such shares shall thereupon be automatically cancelled
and cease to be outstanding.


                                       24
<PAGE>   25
     VI.  USE OF PROCEEDS

          Any cash proceeds received by the Corporation from the sale of shares
of Common Stock under the Plan shall be used for general corporate purposes.

     VII. REGULATORY APPROVALS

          A.   The implementation of the Plan, the granting of any stock option
under the Plan and the issuance of any shares of Common Stock (i) upon the
exercise of any granted option or (ii) under the Stock Issuance Program shall be
subject to the Corporation's procurement of all approvals and permits required
by regulatory authorities having jurisdiction over the Plan, the stock options
granted under it and the shares of Common Stock issued pursuant to it.

          B.   No shares of Common Stock or other assets shall be issued or
delivered under the Plan unless and until there shall have been compliance with
all applicable requirements of Federal and state securities laws, including the
filing and effectiveness of the Form S-8 registration statement for the shares
of Common Stock issuable under the Plan, and all applicable listing requirements
of any stock exchange (or the Nasdaq National Market, if applicable) on which
Common Stock is then listed for trading.

     VIII. NO EMPLOYMENT/SERVICE RIGHTS

          Nothing in the Plan shall confer upon the Optionee or the Participant
any right to continue in Service for any period of specific duration or
interfere with or otherwise restrict in any way the rights of the Corporation
(or any Parent or Subsidiary employing or retaining such person) or of the
Optionee or the Participant, which rights are hereby expressly reserved by each,
to terminate such person's Service at any time for any reason, with or without
cause.


                                       25
<PAGE>   26
                                    APPENDIX

                  The following definitions shall be in effect under the Plan:

          A.   AUTOMATIC OPTION GRANT PROGRAM shall mean the automatic option
grant program in effect under the Plan.

          B.   BENEFICIARY shall mean, in the event the Plan Administrator
implements a beneficiary designation procedure, the person designated by an
Optionee or Participant, pursuant to such procedure, to succeed to such person's
rights under any outstanding awards held by him or her at the time of death. In
the absence of such designation or procedure, the Beneficiary shall be the
personal representative of the estate of the Optionee or Participant or the
person or persons to whom the award is transferred by will or the laws of
descent and distribution.

          C.   BOARD shall mean the Corporation's Board of Directors.

          D.   CHANGE IN CONTROL shall mean a change in ownership or control of
the Corporation effected through any of the following transactions:

                    (i)  a merger, consolidation or reorganization approved by
     the Corporation's stockholders, unless securities representing more than
     fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the voting
     securities of the successor corporation are immediately thereafter
     beneficially owned, directly or indirectly and in substantially the same
     proportion, by the persons who beneficially owned the Corporation's
     outstanding voting securities immediately prior to such transaction,

                    (ii) any stockholder-approved transfer or other disposition
     of all or substantially all of the Corporation's assets, or

                    (iii) the acquisition, directly or indirectly by any person
     or related group of persons (other than the Corporation or a person that
     directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by, or is under common
     control with, the Corporation), of beneficial ownership (within the meaning
     of Rule 13d-3 of the 1934 Act) of securities possessing more than fifty
     percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Corporation's
     outstanding securities pursuant to a tender or exchange offer made directly
     to the Corporation's stockholders which the Board recommends such
     stockholders accept.

          E.   CODE shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

          F.   COMMON STOCK shall mean the Corporation's common stock.

          G.   CORPORATION shall mean Jupiter Communications, Inc., a Delaware
corporation, and any corporate successor to all or substantially all of the
assets or voting stock of Jupiter Communications, Inc. which shall by
appropriate action adopt the Plan.

          H.   DIRECTOR FEE OPTION GRANT PROGRAM shall mean the director fee
option grant program in effect under the Plan.


                                      A-1
<PAGE>   27
          I.   DISCRETIONARY OPTION GRANT PROGRAM shall mean the discretionary
option grant program in effect under the Plan.

          J.   EMPLOYEE shall mean an individual who is in the employ of the
Corporation (or any Parent or Subsidiary), subject to the control and direction
of the employer entity as to both the work to be performed and the manner and
method of performance.

          K.   EXERCISE DATE shall mean the date on which the Corporation shall
have received written notice of the option exercise.

          L.   FAIR MARKET VALUE per share of Common Stock on any relevant date
shall be determined in accordance with the following provisions:

                    (i)  If the Common Stock is at the time traded on the Nasdaq
     National Market, then the Fair Market Value shall be the closing selling
     price per share of Common Stock on the date in question, as such price is
     reported on the Nasdaq National Market or any successor system. If there is
     no closing selling price for the Common Stock on the date in question, then
     the Fair Market Value shall be the closing selling price on the last
     preceding date for which such quotation exists.

                    (ii) If the Common Stock is at the time listed on any Stock
     Exchange, then the Fair Market Value shall be the closing selling price per
     share of Common Stock on the date in question on the Stock Exchange
     determined by the Plan Administrator to be the primary market for the
     Common Stock, as such price is officially quoted in the composite tape of
     transactions on such exchange. If there is no closing selling price for the
     Common Stock on the date in question, then the Fair Market Value shall be
     the closing selling price on the last preceding date for which such
     quotation exists.

                    (iii) For purposes of any option grants made on the
     Underwriting Date, the Fair Market Value shall be deemed to be equal to the
     price per share at which the Common Stock is to be sold in the initial
     public offering pursuant to the Underwriting Agreement.

                    (iv) For purposes of any options made prior to the
     Underwriting Date, the Fair Market Value shall be determined by the Plan
     Administrator, after taking into account such factors as it deems
     appropriate.

          M.   HOSTILE TAKE-OVER shall mean:

                    (i)  the acquisition, directly or indirectly, by any person
     or related group of persons (other than the Corporation or a person that
     directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by, or is under common
     control with, the Corporation) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning
     of Rule 13d-3 of the 1934 Act) of securities possessing more than fifty
     percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Corporation's
     outstanding securities pursuant to a tender or exchange offer made directly
     to the Corporation's stockholders which the Board does not recommend such
     stockholders to accept, or


                                      A-2
<PAGE>   28
                    (ii) a change in the composition of the Board over a period
     of thirty-six (36) consecutive months or less such that a majority of the
     Board members ceases, by reason of one or more contested elections for
     Board membership, to be comprised of individuals who either (A) have been
     Board members continuously since the beginning of such period or (B) have
     been elected or nominated for election as Board members during such period
     by at least a majority of the Board members described in clause (A) who
     were still in office at the time the Board approved such election or
     nomination.

          N.   INCENTIVE OPTION shall mean an option which satisfies the
requirements of Code Section 422.

          O.   INVOLUNTARY TERMINATION shall mean the termination of the Service
of any individual which occurs by reason of:

                    (i)  such individual's involuntary dismissal or discharge by
     the Corporation for reasons other than Misconduct, or

                    (ii) such individual's voluntary resignation following (A) a
     change in his or her position with the Corporation or Parent or Subsidiary
     employing the individual which materially reduces his or her duties and
     responsibilities or the level of management to which he or she reports, (B)
     a reduction in his or her level of compensation (including base salary,
     fringe benefits and target bonus under any performance based bonus or
     incentive programs) by more than fifteen percent (15%) or (C) a relocation
     of such individual's place of employment by more than fifty (50) miles,
     provided and only if such change, reduction or relocation is effected by
     the Corporation without the individual's consent.

          P.   MISCONDUCT shall mean the commission of any act of fraud,
embezzlement or dishonesty by the Optionee or Participant, any unauthorized use
or disclosure by such person of confidential information or trade secrets of the
Corporation (or any Parent or Subsidiary), or any intentional wrongdoing by such
person, whether by omission or commission, which adversely affects the business
or affairs of the Corporation (or any Parent or Subsidiary) in a material
manner. This shall not limit the grounds for the dismissal or discharge of any
person in the Service of the Corporation (or any Parent or Subsidiary).

          Q.   1934 ACT shall mean the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as
amended.

          R.   NON-STATUTORY OPTION shall mean an option not intended to satisfy
the requirements of Code Section 422.

          S.   OPTION SURRENDER VALUE shall mean the Fair Market Value per share
of Common Stock on the date the option is surrendered to the Corporation or, in
the event of a Hostile Take-Over, effected through a tender offer, the highest
reported price per share of Common Stock paid by the tender offeror in effecting
such Hostile Take-Over, if greater. However, if the surrendered option is an
Incentive Option, the Option Surrender Value shall not exceed the Fair Market
Value per share.


                                      A-3
<PAGE>   29
          T.   OPTIONEE shall mean any person to whom an option is granted under
the Discretionary Option Grant, Salary Investment Option Grant, Automatic Option
Grant or Director Fee Option Grant Program.

          U.   PARENT shall mean any corporation (other than the Corporation) in
an unbroken chain of corporations ending with the Corporation, provided each
corporation in the unbroken chain (other than the Corporation) owns, at the time
of the determination, stock possessing fifty percent (50%) or more of the total
combined voting power of all classes of stock in one of the other corporations
in such chain.

          V.   PARTICIPANT shall mean any person who is issued shares of Common
Stock under the Stock Issuance Program.

          W.   PERMANENT DISABILITY OR PERMANENTLY DISABLED shall mean the
inability of the Optionee or the Participant to engage in any substantial
gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental
impairment expected to result in death or to be of continuous duration of twelve
(12) months or more. However, solely for purposes of the Automatic Option Grant
and Director Fee Option Grant Programs, Permanent Disability or Permanently
Disabled shall mean the inability of the non-employee Board member to perform
his or her usual duties as a Board member by reason of any medically
determinable physical or mental impairment expected to result in death or to be
of continuous duration of twelve (12) months or more.

          X.   PLAN shall mean the Corporation's 1999 Stock Incentive Plan, as
set forth in this document.

          Y.   PLAN ADMINISTRATOR shall mean the particular entity, whether the
Primary Committee, the Board or the Secondary Committee, which is authorized to
administer the Discretionary Option Grant, Salary Investment Option Grant and
Stock Issuance Programs with respect to one or more classes of eligible persons,
to the extent such entity is carrying out its administrative functions under
those programs with respect to the persons under its jurisdiction. However, the
Primary Committee shall have the plenary authority to make all factual
determinations and to construe and interpret any and all ambiguities under the
Plan to the extent such authority is not otherwise expressly delegated to any
other Plan Administrator.

          Z.   PLAN EFFECTIVE DATE shall mean September 17, 1999, the date on
which the Plan was adopted by the Board.

          AA.  PRIMARY COMMITTEE shall mean the committee of two (2) or more
non-employee Board members appointed by the Board to administer the
Discretionary Option Grant and Stock Issuance Programs with respect to Section
16 Insiders and to administer the Salary Investment Option Grant Program with
respect to all eligible individuals.

          BB.  SALARY INVESTMENT OPTION GRANT PROGRAM shall mean the salary
investment grant program in effect under the Plan.


                                      A-4
<PAGE>   30
          CC.  SECONDARY COMMITTEE shall mean a committee of one (1) or more
Board members appointed by the Board to administer the Discretionary Option
Grant and Stock Issuance Programs with respect to eligible persons other than
Section 16 Insiders.

          DD.  SECTION 12 REGISTRATION DATE shall mean the date on which the
Common Stock is first registered under Section 12(g) of the 1934 Act.

          EE.  SECTION 16 INSIDER shall mean an officer or director of the
Corporation subject to the short-swing profit liabilities of Section 16 of the
1934 Act.

          FF.  SERVICE shall mean the performance of services for the
Corporation (or any Parent or Subsidiary) by a person in the capacity of an
Employee, a non-employee member of the board of directors or a consultant or
independent advisor, except to the extent otherwise specifically provided in the
documents evidencing the option grant or stock issuance.

          GG.  STOCK EXCHANGE shall mean either the American Stock Exchange or
the New York Stock Exchange.

          HH.  STOCK ISSUANCE PROGRAM shall mean the stock issuance program in
effect under the Plan.

          II.  SUBSIDIARY shall mean any corporation (other than the
Corporation) in an unbroken chain of corporations beginning with the
Corporation, provided each corporation (other than the last corporation) in the
unbroken chain owns, at the time of the determination, stock possessing fifty
percent (50%) or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock
in one of the other corporations in such chain.

          JJ.  10% STOCKHOLDER shall mean the owner of stock (as determined
under Code Section 424(d)) possessing more than ten percent (10%) of the total
combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Corporation (or any Parent
or Subsidiary).

          KK.  UNDERWRITING AGREEMENT shall mean the agreement between the
Corporation and the underwriter or underwriters managing the initial public
offering of the Common Stock.

          LL.  UNDERWRITING DATE shall mean the date on which the Underwriting
Agreement is executed and priced in connection with an initial public offering
of the Common Stock.

          MM.  WITHHOLDING TAXES shall mean the Federal, state and local income
and employment withholding tax liabilities to which the holder of Non-Statutory
Options or unvested shares of Common Stock may become subject in connection with
the exercise of those options or the vesting of those shares.


                                      A-5

<PAGE>   1
                                                                   Exhibit 10.5


                           JUPITER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
                        1999 EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN




     I.   PURPOSE OF THE PLAN

               This 1999 Employee Stock Purchase Plan is intended to promote the
interests of Jupiter Communications, Inc., a Delaware corporation, by providing
eligible employees with the opportunity to acquire a proprietary interest in the
Corporation through participation in a payroll-deduction based employee stock
purchase plan designed to qualify under Section 423 of the Code.

               Capitalized terms herein shall have the meanings assigned to such
terms in the attached Appendix.

     II.  ADMINISTRATION OF THE PLAN

               The Plan Administrator shall have full authority to interpret and
construe any provision of the Plan and to adopt such rules and regulations for
administering the Plan as it may deem necessary in order to comply with the
requirements of Section 423 of the Code. Decisions of the Plan Administrator
shall be final and binding on all parties having an interest in the Plan.

     III. STOCK SUBJECT TO PLAN

               A. The stock purchasable under the Plan shall be shares of
authorized but unissued or reacquired Common Stock, including shares of Common
Stock purchased on the open market. The maximum number of shares of Common Stock
which may be issued over the term of the Plan shall not exceed Five Hundred
Thousand (500,000) shares.

               B. Should any change be made to the Common Stock by reason of any
stock split, stock dividend, recapitalization, combination of shares, exchange
of shares or other change affecting the outstanding Common Stock as a class
without the Corporation's receipt of consideration, appropriate adjustments
shall be made to (i) the maximum number and class of securities issuable under
the Plan, (ii) the maximum number and class of securities purchasable per
Participant and in the aggregate on any one Purchase Date and (iii) the number
and class of securities and the price per share in effect under each outstanding
purchase right in order to prevent the dilution or enlargement of benefits
thereunder.

     IV.  OFFERING PERIODS

               A. Shares of Common Stock shall be offered for purchase under the
Plan through a series of successive offering periods until such time as (i) the
maximum number of shares of Common Stock available for issuance under the Plan
shall have been purchased or (ii) the Plan shall have been sooner terminated.

               B. Each offering period shall be of such duration (not to exceed
twenty-four (24) months) as determined by the Plan Administrator prior to the
start date of such offering period.
<PAGE>   2
However, the initial offering period shall commence at the Effective Time and
terminate on the last business day in October 2001. Subsequent offering periods
shall commence as designated by the Plan Administrator.

               C. Each offering period shall be comprised of a series of one or
more successive Purchase Intervals. Purchase Intervals shall run from the first
business day in May each year to the last business day in October of the same
year and from the first business day in November each year to the last business
day in April of the following year. However, the first Purchase Interval in
effect under the initial offering period shall commence at the Effective Time
and terminate on the last business day in April 2000.

               D. Should the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on any
Purchase Date within an offering period be less than the Fair Market Value per
share of Common Stock on the start date of that offering period, then that
offering period shall automatically terminate immediately after the purchase of
shares of Common Stock on such Purchase Date, and a new offering period shall
commence on the next business day following such Purchase Date. The new offering
period shall have a duration of twenty (24) months, unless a shorter duration is
established by the Plan Administrator within five (5) business days following
the start date of that offering period.

     V.   ELIGIBILITY

               A. Each individual who is an Eligible Employee on the start date
of an offering period under the Plan may enter that offering period on such
start date or on any subsequent Semi-Annual Entry Date within that offering
period, provided he or she remains an Eligible Employee.

               B. Each individual who first becomes an Eligible Employee after
the start date of an offering period may enter that offering period on any
subsequent Semi-Annual Entry Date within that offering period on which he or she
is an Eligible Employee.

               C. The date an individual enters an offering period shall be
designated his or her Entry Date for purposes of that offering period.

               D. To participate in the Plan for a particular offering period,
the Eligible Employee must complete the enrollment forms prescribed by the Plan
Administrator (including a stock purchase agreement and a payroll deduction
authorization) and file such forms with the Plan Administrator (or its
designate) on or before his or her scheduled Entry Date.

     VI.  PAYROLL DEDUCTIONS

               A. The payroll deduction authorized by the Participant for
purposes of acquiring shares of Common Stock during an offering period may be
any multiple of one percent (1%) of the Cash Earnings paid to the Participant
during each Purchase Interval within that offering period, up to a maximum of
fifteen percent (15%). The deduction rate so authorized shall continue in effect
throughout the offering period, except to the extent such rate is changed in
accordance with the following guidelines:


                                       2
<PAGE>   3
                    (i) The Participant may, at any time during the offering
          period, reduce his or her rate of payroll deduction to become
          effective as soon as possible after filing the appropriate form with
          the Plan Administrator. The Participant may not, however, effect more
          than one (1) such reduction per Purchase Interval.

                    (ii) The Participant may, prior to the commencement of any
          new Purchase Interval within the offering period, increase the rate of
          his or her payroll deduction by filing the appropriate form with the
          Plan Administrator. The new rate (which may not exceed the fifteen
          percent (15%) maximum) shall become effective on the start date of the
          first Purchase Interval following the filing of such form.

               B. Payroll deductions shall begin on the first pay day following
the Participant's Entry Date into the offering period and shall (unless sooner
terminated by the Participant) continue through the pay day ending with or
immediately prior to the last day of that offering period. The amounts so
collected shall be credited to the Participant's book account under the Plan,
but no interest shall be paid on the balance from time to time outstanding in
such account. The amounts collected from the Participant shall not be required
to be held in any segregated account or trust fund and may be commingled with
the general assets of the Corporation and used for general corporate purposes.

               C. Payroll deductions shall automatically cease upon the
termination of the Participant's purchase right in accordance with the
provisions of the Plan.

               D. The Participant's acquisition of Common Stock under the Plan
on any Purchase Date shall neither limit nor require the Participant's
acquisition of Common Stock on any subsequent Purchase Date, whether within the
same or a different offering period.

     VII. PURCHASE RIGHTS

               A. GRANT OF PURCHASE RIGHT. A Participant shall be granted a
separate purchase right for each offering period in which he or she
participates. The purchase right shall be granted on the Participant's Entry
Date into the offering period and shall provide the Participant with the right
to purchase shares of Common Stock, in a series of successive installments over
the remainder of such offering period, upon the terms set forth below. The
Participant shall execute a stock purchase agreement embodying such terms and
such other provisions (not inconsistent with the Plan) as the Plan Administrator
may deem advisable.

               Under no circumstances shall purchase rights be granted under the
Plan to any Eligible Employee if such individual would, immediately after the
grant, own (within the meaning of Code Section 424(d)) or hold outstanding
options or other rights to purchase, stock possessing five percent (5%) or more
of the total combined voting power or value of all classes of stock of the
Corporation or any Corporate Affiliate.

               B. EXERCISE OF THE PURCHASE RIGHT. Each purchase right shall be
automatically exercised in installments on each successive Purchase Date within
the offering period, and shares of Common Stock shall accordingly be purchased
on behalf of each Participant (other than Participants whose payroll deductions
have previously been refunded pursuant to the


                                       3
<PAGE>   4
Termination of Purchase Right provisions below) on each such Purchase Date. The
purchase shall be effected by applying the Participant's payroll deductions for
the Purchase Interval ending on such Purchase Date to the purchase of whole
shares of Common Stock at the purchase price in effect for the Participant for
that Purchase Date.

               C. PURCHASE PRICE. The purchase price per share at which Common
Stock will be purchased on the Participant's behalf on each Purchase Date within
the offering period shall be equal to eighty-five percent (85%) of the lower of
(i) the Fair Market Value per share of Common Stock on the Participant's Entry
Date into that offering period or (ii) the Fair Market Value per share of Common
Stock on that Purchase Date.

               D. NUMBER OF PURCHASABLE SHARES. The number of shares of Common
Stock purchasable by a Participant on each Purchase Date during the offering
period shall be the number of whole shares obtained by dividing the amount
collected from the Participant through payroll deductions during the Purchase
Interval ending with that Purchase Date by the purchase price in effect for the
Participant for that Purchase Date. However, the maximum number of shares of
Common Stock purchasable per Participant on any one Purchase Date shall not
exceed Eight Hundred Fifty (850) shares, subject to periodic adjustments in the
event of certain changes in the Corporation's capitalization. In addition, the
maximum number of shares of Common Stock purchasable in the aggregate by all
Participants on any one Purchase Date shall not exceed One Hundred Twenty-Five
Thousand (125,000) shares, subject to periodic adjustments in the event of
certain changes in the corporation's capitalization.

               E. EXCESS PAYROLL DEDUCTIONS. Any payroll deductions not applied
to the purchase of shares of Common Stock on any Purchase Date because they are
not sufficient to purchase a whole share of Common Stock shall be held for the
purchase of Common Stock on the next Purchase Date. However, any payroll
deductions not applied to the purchase of Common Stock by reason of the
limitation on the maximum number of shares purchasable on the Purchase Date
shall be promptly refunded.

               F. TERMINATION OF PURCHASE RIGHT. The following provisions shall
govern the termination of outstanding purchase rights:

                    (i) A Participant may, at any time prior to the next
     scheduled Purchase Date in the offering period, terminate his or her
     outstanding purchase right by filing the appropriate form with the Plan
     Administrator (or its designate), and no further payroll deductions shall
     be collected from the Participant with respect to the terminated purchase
     right. Any payroll deductions collected during the Purchase Interval in
     which such termination occurs shall, at the Participant's election, be
     immediately refunded or held for the purchase of shares on the next
     Purchase Date. If no such election is made at the time such purchase right
     is terminated, then the payroll deductions collected with respect to the
     terminated right shall be refunded as soon as possible.

                    (ii) The termination of such purchase right shall be
     irrevocable, and the Participant may not subsequently rejoin the offering
     period for which the terminated purchase right was granted. In order to
     resume participation in any


                                       4
<PAGE>   5
     subsequent offering period, such individual must re-enroll in the Plan (by
     making a timely filing of the prescribed enrollment forms) on or before his
     or her scheduled Entry Date into that offering period.

                    (iii) Should the Participant cease to remain an Eligible
     Employee for any reason (including death, disability or change in status)
     while his or her purchase right remains outstanding, then that purchase
     right shall immediately terminate, and all of the Participant's payroll
     deductions for the Purchase Interval in which the purchase right so
     terminates shall be immediately refunded. However, should the Participant
     cease to remain in active service by reason of an approved unpaid leave of
     absence, then the Participant shall have the right, exercisable up until
     the last business day of the Purchase Interval in which such leave
     commences, to (a) withdraw all the payroll deductions collected to date on
     his or her behalf for that Purchase Interval or (b) have such funds held
     for the purchase of shares on his or her behalf on the next scheduled
     Purchase Date. In no event, however, shall any further payroll deductions
     be collected on the Participant's behalf during such leave. Upon the
     Participant's return to active service (i) within ninety (90) days
     following the commencement of such leave or, (ii) prior to the expiration
     of any longer period for which such Participant's right to reemployment
     with the Corporation is guaranteed by either statute or contract, his or
     her payroll deductions under the Plan shall automatically resume at the
     rate in effect at the time the leave began. However, should the
     Participant's leave of absence exceed ninety (90) days and his or her
     re-employment rights not be guaranteed by either statute or contract, then
     the Participant's status as an Eligible Employee will be deemed to
     terminate on the ninety-first (91st) day of that leave, and such
     Participant's purchase right for the offering period in which that leave
     began shall thereupon terminate. An individual who returns to active
     employment following such a leave shall be treated as a new Employee for
     purposes of the Plan and must, in order to resume participation in the
     Plan, re-enroll in the Plan (by making a timely filing of the prescribed
     enrollment forms) on or before his or her scheduled Entry Date into the
     offering period.

               G. CORPORATE TRANSACTION. Each outstanding purchase right shall
automatically be exercised, immediately prior to the effective date of any
Corporate Transaction, by applying the payroll deductions of each Participant
for the Purchase Interval in which such Corporate Transaction occurs to the
purchase of whole shares of Common Stock at a purchase price per share equal to
eighty-five percent (85%) of the lower of (i) the Fair Market Value per share of
Common Stock on the Participant's Entry Date into the offering period in which
such Corporate Transaction occurs or (ii) the Fair Market Value per share of
Common Stock immediately prior to the effective date of such Corporate
Transaction. However, the applicable limitations on the number of shares of
Common Stock purchasable per Participant and in the aggregate shall continue to
apply to any such purchase.

               The Corporation shall use its best efforts to provide at least
ten (10)-days prior written notice of the occurrence of any Corporate
Transaction, and Participants shall, following the receipt of such notice, have
the right to terminate their outstanding purchase rights prior to the effective
date of the Corporate Transaction.


                                       5
<PAGE>   6
               H. PRORATION OF PURCHASE RIGHTS. Should the total number of
shares of Common Stock to be purchased pursuant to outstanding purchase rights
on any particular date exceed the number of shares then available for issuance
under the Plan, the Plan Administrator shall make a pro-rata allocation of the
available shares on a uniform and nondiscriminatory basis, and the payroll
deductions of each Participant, to the extent in excess of the aggregate
purchase price payable for the Common Stock pro-rated to such individual, shall
be refunded.

               I. ASSIGNABILITY. The purchase right shall be exercisable only by
the Participant and shall not be assignable or transferable by the Participant.

               J. STOCKHOLDER RIGHTS. A Participant shall have no stockholder
rights with respect to the shares subject to his or her outstanding purchase
right until the shares are purchased on the Participant's behalf in accordance
with the provisions of the Plan and the Participant has become a holder of
record of the purchased shares.

     VIII. ACCRUAL LIMITATIONS

               A. No Participant shall be entitled to accrue rights to acquire
Common Stock pursuant to any purchase right outstanding under this Plan if and
to the extent such accrual, when aggregated with (i) rights to purchase Common
Stock accrued under any other purchase right granted under this Plan and (ii)
similar rights accrued under other employee stock purchase plans (within the
meaning of Code Section 423) of the Corporation or any Corporate Affiliate,
would otherwise permit such Participant to purchase more than Twenty-Five
Thousand Dollars ($25,000) worth of stock of the Corporation or any Corporate
Affiliate (determined on the basis of the Fair Market Value per share on the
date or dates such rights are granted) for each calendar year such rights are at
any time outstanding.

               B. For purposes of applying such accrual limitations to the
purchase rights granted under the Plan, the following provisions shall be in
effect:

                    (i) The right to acquire Common Stock under each outstanding
     purchase right shall accrue in a series of installments on each successive
     Purchase Date during the offering period on which such right remains
     outstanding.

                    (ii) No right to acquire Common Stock under any outstanding
     purchase right shall accrue to the extent the Participant has already
     accrued in the same calendar year the right to acquire Common Stock under
     one (1) or more other purchase rights at a rate equal to Twenty-Five
     Thousand Dollars ($25,000) worth of Common Stock (determined on the basis
     of the Fair Market Value per share on the date or dates of grant) for each
     calendar year such rights were at any time outstanding.

               C. If by reason of such accrual limitations, any purchase right
of a Participant does not accrue for a particular Purchase Interval, then the
payroll deductions which the Participant made during that Purchase Interval with
respect to such purchase right shall be promptly refunded.


                                       6
<PAGE>   7
               D. In the event there is any conflict between the provisions of
this Article and one or more provisions of the Plan or any instrument issued
thereunder, the provisions of this Article shall be controlling.

     IX.  EFFECTIVE DATE AND TERM OF THE PLAN

               A. The Plan was adopted by the Board on September 17, 1999 and
shall become effective at the Effective Time, provided no purchase rights
granted under the Plan shall be exercised, and no shares of Common Stock shall
be issued hereunder, until (i) the Plan shall have been approved by the
stockholders of the Corporation and (ii) the Corporation shall have complied
with all applicable requirements of the 1933 Act (including the registration of
the shares of Common Stock issuable under the Plan on a Form S-8 registration
statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission), all applicable
listing requirements of any stock exchange (or the Nasdaq National Market, if
applicable) on which the Common Stock is listed for trading and all other
applicable requirements established by law or regulation. In the event such
stockholder approval is not obtained, or such compliance is not effected, within
twelve (12) months after the date on which the Plan is adopted by the Board, the
Plan shall terminate and have no further force or effect, and all sums collected
from Participants during the initial offering period hereunder shall be
refunded.

               B. Unless sooner terminated by the Board, the Plan shall
terminate upon the earliest of (i) the last business day in October 2009, (ii)
the date on which all shares available for issuance under the Plan shall have
been sold pursuant to purchase rights exercised under the Plan or (iii) the date
on which all purchase rights are exercised in connection with a Corporate
Transaction. No further purchase rights shall be granted or exercised, and no
further payroll deductions shall be collected, under the Plan following such
termination.

     X.   AMENDMENT/TERMINATION OF THE PLAN

               A. The Board may alter, amend, suspend or terminate the Plan at
any time to become effective immediately following the close of any Purchase
Interval. However, the Plan may be amended or terminated immediately upon Board
action, if and to the extent necessary to assure that the Corporation will not
recognize, for financial reporting purposes, any compensation expense in
connection with the shares of Common Stock offered for purchase under the Plan,
should the financial accounting rules applicable to the Plan at the Effective
Time be subsequently revised so as to require the recognition of compensation
expense in the absence of such amendment or termination.

               B. In no event may the Board effect any of the following
amendments or revisions to the Plan without the approval of the Corporation's
stockholders: (i) increase the number of shares of Common Stock issuable under
the Plan or the maximum number of shares purchasable per Participant on any one
Purchase Date, except for permissible adjustments in the event of certain
changes in the Corporation's capitalization, (ii) alter the purchase price
formula so as to reduce the purchase price payable for the shares of Common
Stock purchasable under the Plan or (iii) modify eligibility requirements for
participation in the Plan.


                                       7
<PAGE>   8
     XI.  GENERAL PROVISIONS

               A. Nothing in the Plan shall confer upon the Participant any
right to continue in the employ of the Corporation or any Corporate Affiliate
for any period of specific duration or interfere with or otherwise restrict in
any way the rights of the Corporation (or any Corporate Affiliate employing such
person) or of the Participant, which rights are hereby expressly reserved by
each, to terminate such person's employment at any time for any reason, with or
without cause.

               B. All costs and expenses incurred in the administration of the
Plan shall be paid by the Corporation; however, each Plan Participant shall bear
all costs and expenses incurred by such individual in the sale or other
disposition of any shares purchased under the Plan.

               C. The provisions of the Plan shall be governed by the laws of
the State of New York without regard to that State's conflict-of-laws rules.


                                       8
<PAGE>   9
                                   SCHEDULE A

                          CORPORATIONS PARTICIPATING IN
                          EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN
                            AS OF THE EFFECTIVE TIME

                          Jupiter Communications, Inc.
                           Jupiter Communications, LLC
<PAGE>   10
                                    APPENDIX


               The following definitions shall be in effect under the Plan:

               A. BOARD shall mean the Corporation's Board of Directors.

               B. CASH EARNINGS shall mean the (i) base salary payable to a
Participant by one or more Participating Corporations during such individual's
period of participation in one or more offering periods under the Plan plus (ii)
all overtime payments, bonuses, commissions, current profit-sharing
distributions and other incentive-type payments. Such Cash Earnings shall be
calculated before deduction of (A) any income or employment tax withholdings or
(B) any pre-tax contributions made by the Participant to any Code Section 401(k)
salary deferral plan or any Code Section 125 cafeteria benefit program now or
hereafter established by the Corporation or any Corporate Affiliate. However,
Cash Earnings shall NOT include any contributions (other than Code Section
401(k) or Code Section 125 contributions) made on the Participant's behalf by
the Corporation or any Corporate Affiliate to any employee benefit or welfare
plan now or hereafter established.

               C. CODE shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

               D. COMMON STOCK shall mean the Corporation's common stock.

               E. CORPORATE AFFILIATE shall mean any parent or subsidiary
corporation of the Corporation (as determined in accordance with Code Section
424), whether now existing or subsequently established.

               F. CORPORATE TRANSACTION shall mean either of the following
stockholder-approved transactions to which the Corporation is a party:

                    (i) a merger or consolidation in which securities possessing
     more than fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the
     Corporation's outstanding securities are transferred to a person or persons
     different from the persons holding those securities immediately prior to
     such transaction, or

                    (ii) the sale, transfer or other disposition of all or
     substantially all of the assets of the Corporation in complete liquidation
     or dissolution of the Corporation, or

                    (iii) the acquisition, directly or indirectly by an person
     or related group of persons (other than the Corporation or a person that
     directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by or is under common
     control with the Corporation) of beneficial ownership (within the meaning
     of Rule 13d-3 of the 1934 Act) of securities possessing more than fifty
     percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of the Corporation's
     outstanding securities pursuant to a tender or exchange offer made directly
     to the Corporation's stockholders.


                                      A-1
<PAGE>   11
               G. CORPORATION shall mean Jupiter Communications, Inc., a
Delaware corporation, and any corporate successor to all or substantially all of
the assets or voting stock of Jupiter Communications, Inc. which shall by
appropriate action adopt the Plan.

               H. EFFECTIVE TIME shall mean the time at which the Underwriting
Agreement is executed. Any Corporate Affiliate which becomes a Participating
Corporation after such Effective Time shall designate a subsequent Effective
Time with respect to its employee-Participants.

               I. ELIGIBLE EMPLOYEE shall mean any person who is employed by a
Participating Corporation on a basis under which he or she is regularly expected
to render more than twenty (20) hours of service per week for more than five (5)
months per calendar year for earnings considered wages under Code Section
3401(a).

               J. ENTRY DATE shall mean the date an Eligible Employee first
commences participation in the offering period in effect under the Plan. The
earliest Entry Date under the Plan shall be the Effective Time.

               K. FAIR MARKET VALUE per share of Common Stock on any relevant
date shall be determined in accordance with the following provisions:

                    (i) If the Common Stock is at the time traded on the Nasdaq
     National Market, then the Fair Market Value shall be the closing selling
     price per share of Common Stock on the date in question, as such price is
     reported by the National Association of Securities Dealers on the Nasdaq
     National Market or any successor system. If there is no closing selling
     price for the Common Stock on the date in question, then the Fair Market
     Value shall be the closing selling price on the last preceding date for
     which such quotation exists.

                    (ii) If the Common Stock is at the time listed on any Stock
     Exchange, then the Fair Market Value shall be the closing selling price per
     share of Common Stock on the date in question on the Stock Exchange
     determined by the Plan Administrator to be the primary market for the
     Common Stock, as such price is officially quoted in the composite tape of
     transactions on such exchange. If there is no closing selling price for the
     Common Stock on the date in question, then the Fair Market Value shall be
     the closing selling price on the last preceding date for which such
     quotation exists.

                    (iii) For purposes of the initial offering period which
     begins at the Effective Time, the Fair Market Value shall be deemed to be
     equal to the price per share at which the Common Stock is sold in the
     initial public offering pursuant to the Underwriting Agreement.

               L. 1933 ACT shall mean the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

               M. PARTICIPANT shall mean any Eligible Employee of a
Participating Corporation who is actively participating in the Plan.


                                      A-2
<PAGE>   12
               N. PARTICIPATING CORPORATION shall mean the Corporation and such
Corporate Affiliate or Affiliates as may be authorized from time to time by the
Board to extend the benefits of the Plan to their Eligible Employees. The
Participating Corporations in the Plan are listed in attached Schedule A.

               O. PLAN shall mean the Corporation's 1999 Employee Stock Purchase
Plan, as set forth in this document.

               P. PLAN ADMINISTRATOR shall mean the committee of two (2) or more
Board members appointed by the Board to administer the Plan.

               Q. PURCHASE DATE shall mean the last business day of each
Purchase Interval. The initial Purchase Date shall be January 31, 2000.

               R. PURCHASE INTERVAL shall mean each successive six (6)-month
period within the offering period at the end of which there shall be purchased
shares of Common Stock on behalf of each Participant.

               S. SEMI-ANNUAL ENTRY DATE shall mean the first business day in
May and November each year on which an Eligible Employee may first enter an
offering period.

               T. STOCK EXCHANGE shall mean either the American Stock Exchange
or the New York Stock Exchange.

               U. UNDERWRITING AGREEMENT shall mean the agreement between the
Corporation and the underwriter or underwriters managing the Corporation's
initial public offering of its Common Stock.


                                      A-3

<PAGE>   1

                                                                    Exhibit 23.1

                       CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT ACCOUNTANTS

The Board of Directors
Jupiter Communications, LLC

     The audits referred to in our report dated March 18, 1999, included the
related financial statement schedule for each of the years in the three year
period ended December 31, 1998, included in the registration statement. The
financial statement schedule is the responsibility of the Company's management.
Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the financial statement schedule
based on our audits. In our opinion, such financial statement schedule, when
considered in relation to the basic financial statements taken as a whole,
presents fairly in all material respects the information set forth therein.

     We consent to the use of our reports included herein and to the reference
to our firm under the heading "Experts" in the prospectus.

                                          /s/ KPMG LLP
                                          KPMG LLP

New York, New York
September 17, 1999


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission